Light-Emitting Element, Display Device, Electronic Device, and Lighting Device

ABSTRACT

A light-emitting element with high emission efficiency and high reliability is provided. The light-emitting element includes a light-emitting layer containing a first organic compound, a second organic compound, and a guest material. The first organic compound has a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. In the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03, or alternatively, the weight ratio of the organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

One embodiment of the present invention relates to a light-emitting element, or a display device, an electronic device, and a lighting device each including the light-emitting element.

Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field. The technical field of one embodiment of the invention disclosed in this specification and the like relates to an object, a method, or a manufacturing method. In addition, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a process, a machine, manufacture, or a composition of matter. Specifically, examples of the technical field of one embodiment of the present invention disclosed in this specification include a semiconductor device, a display device, a liquid crystal display device, a light-emitting device, a lighting device, a power storage device, a memory device, a method for driving any of them, and a method for manufacturing any of them.

2. Description of the Related Art

In recent years, research and development have been extensively conducted on light-emitting elements using electroluminescence (EL). In a basic structure of such a light-emitting element, a layer containing a light-emitting substance (an EL layer) is interposed between a pair of electrodes. By applying a voltage between the pair of electrodes of this element, light emission from the light-emitting substance can be obtained.

Since the above light-emitting element is of a self-luminous type, a display device using this light-emitting element has advantages such as high visibility, no necessity of a backlight, low power consumption, and the like. Further, the display device also has advantages in that it can be formed to be thin and lightweight, and has high response speed.

In a light-emitting element (e.g., an organic EL element) whose EL layer contains an organic compound as a light-emitting substance and is provided between a pair of electrodes, application of a voltage between the pair of electrodes causes injection of electrons from a cathode and holes from an anode into the EL layer and thus a current flows. By recombination of the injected electrons and holes, the organic compound having a light-emitting property is brought into an excited state to provide light emission.

A light-emitting organic compound exhibits its specific light emission. Thus, the use of various organic compounds as light-emitting substances enables light-emitting elements to exhibit various kinds of light emission.

The efficiency and reliability are important characteristics of such light-emitting elements. It is thus important to reduce impurities that degrade the efficiency and reliability of light-emitting elements. Patent Document 1 discloses a light-emitting element whose reliability is improved by reducing the concentration of a halogen compound in an EL layer that contains an organic compound below a certain level.

REFERENCE Patent Document

-   [Patent Document 1] International Publication WO 00/41443

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

While some impurities deteriorate the characteristics of light-emitting elements such as efficiency and reliability, other impurities do not affect the characteristics of light-emitting elements. Thus, it is important to identify the kind of an impurity that deteriorates the characteristics of light-emitting elements. However, since the content of impurities in a light-emitting element is low, impurities are difficult to identify in many cases. Moreover, the mechanism in which impurities deteriorate the characteristics of light-emitting elements is hardly clarified.

In view of the above, an object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting element with high reliability. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting element that has high emission efficiency. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting element with reduced power consumption. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel light-emitting element. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel light-emitting device. Another object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device.

Note that the description of these objects does not disturb the existence of other objects. In one embodiment of the present invention, there is no need to achieve all the objects. Other objects will be apparent from and can be derived from the description of the specification and the like.

One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting element that includes a light-emitting layer. The light-emitting layer contains a first organic compound and a guest material. The first organic compound has a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. In the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting element that includes a light-emitting layer. The light-emitting layer contains a first organic compound and a guest material. The first organic compound has at least one of a pyridine skeleton, a diazine skeleton, and a triazine skeleton. In the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a pyrrole skeleton with an NH group, an imidazole skeleton with an NH group, a triazole skeleton with an NH group, a tetrazole skeleton with an NH group, or an aromatic amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting element that includes a light-emitting layer. The light-emitting layer contains a first organic compound, a second organic compound, and a guest material. The first organic compound has a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. The second organic compound has at least one of a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton and a tertiary amine skeleton. In the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting element that includes a light-emitting layer. The light-emitting layer contains a first organic compound, a second organic compound, and a guest material. The first organic compound has at least one of a pyridine skeleton, a diazine skeleton, and a triazine skeleton. The second organic compound has at least one of a pyrrole skeleton, an imidazole skeleton, a triazole skeleton, a tetrazole skeleton, and an aromatic amine skeleton. In the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a pyrrole skeleton with an NH group, an imidazole skeleton with an NH group, a triazole skeleton with an NH group, a tetrazole skeleton with an NH group, or an aromatic amine skeleton with an NH group to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.

In each of the above structures, one embodiment of the present invention is especially effective in the case where the activation energy necessary for cleavage in the NH bond in the organic compound with an NH group in an excited state is less than or equal to 0.3 eV. In addition, one embodiment of the present invention is especially effective in the case where stabilization energy in cleavage in an NH bond in the NH group is less than 0 eV.

In the light-emitting layer in each of the above structures, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton in which a nitrogen atom has an unpaired electron or an organic compound having an aromatic amine skeleton in which a nitrogen atom has an unpaired electron to the first organic compound is preferably less than or equal to 0.03. Furthermore, in the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the first organic compound to the first organic compound is preferably less than or equal to 0.03.

In the light-emitting layer in each of the above structures, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton in which a nitrogen atom has an unpaired electron or an organic compound having an aromatic amine skeleton in which a nitrogen atom has an unpaired electron to the second organic compound is preferably less than or equal to 0.01. Furthermore, in the light-emitting layer, the weight ratio of an organic compound in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the first organic compound to the second organic compound is preferably less than or equal to 0.01.

In each of the above structure, the guest material is preferably configured to convert triplet excitation energy into light emission. Furthermore, the guest material preferably contains iridium.

Another embodiment of the present invention is a display device including the light-emitting element having any of the above-described structures, and at least one of a color filter and a transistor. Another embodiment of the present invention is an electronic device including the above-described display device and at least one of a housing and a touch sensor. Another embodiment of the present invention is a lighting device including the light-emitting element having any of the above-described structures, and at least one of a housing and a touch sensor. The category of one embodiment of the present invention includes not only a light-emitting device including a light-emitting element but also an electronic device including a light-emitting device. The light-emitting device in this specification refers to an image display device and a light source (e.g., a lighting device). A display module in which a connector such as a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or a tape carrier package (TCP) is connected to a light-emitting element, a display module in which a printed wiring board is provided on the tip of a TCP, and a display module in which an integrated circuit (IC) is directly mounted on a light-emitting element by a chip on glass (COG) method are also embodiments of the present invention.

With one embodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting element with high reliability can be provided. With one embodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting element that has high emission efficiency can be provided. With one embodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting element with reduced power consumption can be provided. With one embodiment of the present invention, a novel light-emitting element can be provided. With one embodiment of the present invention, a novel light-emitting device can be provided. With one embodiment of the present invention, a novel display device can be provided.

Note that the description of these effects does not disturb the existence of other effects. One embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily have all the effects described above. Other effects will be apparent from and can be derived from the description of the specification, the drawings, the claims, and the like.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIGS. 1A and 1B are schematic cross-sectional views of a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2 illustrates a reaction in one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 3A and 3B illustrate reactions in embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 4A and 4B illustrate reactions in embodiments of the present invention.

FIG. 5 shows a correlation between a LUMO level and energy in one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 6A and 6B are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention and FIG. 6C illustrates a correlation between energy levels in a light-emitting layer.

FIGS. 7A and 7B are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention and FIG. 7C illustrates a correlation between energy levels in a light-emitting layer.

FIGS. 8A and 8B are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention and FIG. 8C illustrates a correlation between energy levels in a light-emitting layer.

FIGS. 9A and 9B are schematic cross-sectional views of light-emitting elements of embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic cross-sectional views of light-emitting elements of embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 11A to 11C are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a method for fabricating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 12A to 12C are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a method for fabricating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 13A and 13B are a top view and a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 14A and 14B are schematic cross-sectional views each illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 15 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 16A and 16B are schematic cross-sectional views each illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 17A and 17B are schematic cross-sectional views each illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 18 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 19A and 19B are schematic cross-sectional views each illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 20 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 21A and 21B are schematic cross-sectional views each illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 22A to 22D are schematic cross-sectional views illustrating a method for forming an EL layer.

FIG. 23 is a conceptual diagram illustrating a droplet discharge apparatus.

FIGS. 24A and 24B are a block diagram and a circuit diagram illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 25A and 25B are circuit diagrams each illustrating a pixel circuit of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 26A and 26B are circuit diagrams each illustrating a pixel circuit of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 27A and 27B are perspective views illustrating an example of a touch panel of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 28A to 28C are cross-sectional views illustrating examples of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention and an example of a touch sensor of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 29A and 29B are cross-sectional views each illustrating an example of a touch panel of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 30A and 30B are a block diagram and a timing chart of a touch sensor in one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram of a touch sensor in one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 32 is a perspective view illustrating a display module of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 33A to 33G illustrate electronic devices of embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 34A to 34F illustrate electronic devices of embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 35A to 35E illustrate electronic devices of embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 36A to 36D illustrate electronic devices of embodiments of the present invention.

FIGS. 37A and 37B are perspective views illustrating a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 38A to 38C are a perspective view and cross-sectional views illustrating a light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 39A to 39D are cross-sectional views each illustrating a light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIGS. 40A and 40B illustrate an electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention and FIG. 40C illustrates a lighting device of one embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 41 illustrates lighting devices of embodiments of the present invention.

FIG. 42 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a light-emitting element in Example.

FIG. 43 is a graph showing current density-luminance characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 44 is a graph showing voltage-luminance characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 45 is a graph showing luminance-current efficiency characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 46 is a graph showing luminance-external quantum efficiency characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 47 is a graph showing luminance-power efficiency characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 48 is a graph showing electroluminescence spectra of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIGS. 49A and 49B are each a graph showing absorption and emission spectra of compounds in Example.

FIGS. 50A and 50B are each a graph showing emission spectra of a compound in Example.

FIG. 51 is a graph showing emission spectra of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 52 shows a correlation between external quantum efficiency and emission spectrum intensity of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 53 shows reliability test results of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIGS. 54A and 54B each show a correlation between a weight ratio of an impurity and reliability of light-emitting elements.

FIG. 55 is a graph showing current density-luminance characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 56 is a graph showing voltage-luminance characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 57 is a graph showing luminance-current efficiency characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 58 is a graph showing luminance-external quantum efficiency characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 59 is a graph showing luminance-power efficiency characteristics of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 60 is a graph showing electroluminescence spectra of light-emitting elements in Example.

FIG. 61 is a graph showing emission spectra of thin films in Example.

FIG. 62 is a graph showing emission spectra of thin films in Example.

FIG. 63 is a graph showing emission spectra of thin films in Example.

FIG. 64 is a graph showing measurement results of emission quantum yields of thin films in Example.

FIG. 65 is a graph showing measurement results of emission quantum yields of thin films in Example.

FIG. 66 is a graph showing measurement results of emission quantum yields of thin films in Example.

FIG. 67 is a graph showing transient fluorescence characteristics of thin films in Example.

FIG. 68 is a graph showing transient fluorescence characteristics of thin films in Example.

FIG. 69 is a graph showing transient fluorescence characteristics of thin films in Example.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to description to be given below, and it is to be easily understood that modes and details thereof can be variously modified without departing from the purpose and the scope of the present invention. Accordingly, the present invention should not be interpreted as being limited to the content of the embodiments below.

Note that the position, the size, the range, or the like of each structure illustrated in drawings and the like is not accurately represented in some cases for easy understanding. Therefore, the disclosed invention is not necessarily limited to the position, the size, the range, or the like disclosed in the drawings and the like.

Note that the ordinal numbers such as “first”, “second”, and the like in this specification and the like are used for convenience and do not denote the order of steps or the stacking order of layers. Therefore, for example, description can be made even when “first” is replaced with “second” or “third”, as appropriate. In addition, the ordinal numbers in this specification and the like are not necessarily the same as those which specify one embodiment of the present invention.

In the description of modes of the present invention in this specification and the like with reference to the drawings, the same components in different diagrams are commonly denoted by the same reference numeral in some cases.

In this specification and the like, the terms “film” and “layer” can be interchanged with each other. For example, the term “conductive layer” can be changed into the term “conductive film” in some cases, and the term “insulating film” can be changed into the term “insulating layer” in some cases.

In this specification and the like, a singlet excited state (S*) refers to a singlet state having excitation energy. An S1 level means the lowest level of the singlet excitation energy level, that is, the excitation energy level of the lowest singlet excited state (S state). A triplet excited state (T*) refers to a triplet state having excitation energy. A T1 level means the lowest level of the triplet excitation energy level, that is, the excitation energy level of the lowest triplet excited state (T1 state). Note that in this specification and the like, simple expressions “singlet excited state” and “singlet excitation energy level” mean the S1 state and the S1 level, respectively, in some cases. In addition, expressions “triplet excited state” and “triplet excitation energy level” mean the T1 state and the T1 level, respectively, in some cases.

In this specification and the like, a fluorescent compound refers to a substance that emits light in the visible light region when the relaxation from the singlet excited state to the ground state occurs. A phosphorescent compound refers to a substance that emits light in the visible light region at room temperature when the relaxation from the triplet excited state to the ground state occurs. That is, a phosphorescent compound refers to a substance that can convert triplet excitation energy into visible light.

Phosphorescence emission energy or triplet excitation energy can be obtained from a wavelength of a phosphorescence emission peak (including a shoulder) or a rising portion on the shortest wavelength side of phosphorescence emission. Note that the phosphorescence emission can be observed by time-resolved photoluminescence in a low-temperature (e.g., 10 K) environment. Thermally activated delayed fluorescence emission energy can be obtained from a wavelength of an emission peak (including a shoulder) or a rising portion on the shortest wavelength side of thermally activated delayed fluorescence.

Note that in this specification and the like, “room temperature” refers to a temperature higher than or equal to 0° C. and lower than or equal to 40° C.

In this specification and the like, a wavelength range of blue refers to a wavelength range of greater than or equal to 400 nm and less than 500 nm, and blue light has at least one peak in that range in an emission spectrum. A wavelength range of green refers to a wavelength range of greater than or equal to 500 nm and less than 580 nm, and green light has at least one peak in that range in an emission spectrum. A wavelength range of red refers to a wavelength range of greater than or equal to 580 nm and less than or equal to 680 nm, and red light has at least one peak in that range in an emission spectrum.

Embodiment 1

In this embodiment, a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1A and 1B, FIG. 2, FIGS. 3A and 3B, FIGS. 4A and 4B, and FIG. 5.

<Structure Example of Light-Emitting Element>

First, a structure of the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A and 1B.

FIG. 1A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting element 150 of one embodiment of the present invention.

The light-emitting element 150 includes a pair of electrodes (an electrode 101 and an electrode 102) and an EL layer 100 between the pair of electrodes. The EL layer 100 includes at least a light-emitting layer 130.

The EL layer 100 illustrated in FIG. 1A includes functional layers such as a hole-injection layer 111, a hole-transport layer 112, an electron-transport layer 118, and an electron-injection layer 119, in addition to the light-emitting layer 130.

In this embodiment, although description is given assuming that the electrode 101 and the electrode 102 of the pair of electrodes serve as an anode and a cathode, respectively, they are not limited thereto for the structure of the light-emitting element 150. That is, the electrode 101 may be a cathode, the electrode 102 may be an anode, and the stacking order of the layers between the electrodes may be reversed. In other words, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the light-emitting layer 130, the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 may be stacked in this order from the anode side.

The structure of the EL layer 100 is not limited to the structure illustrated in FIG. 1A, and a structure including at least one layer selected from the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 may be employed. Alternatively, the EL layer 100 may include a functional layer which is capable of lowering a hole- or electron-injection barrier, improving a hole- or electron-transport property, inhibiting a hole- or electron-transport property, or suppressing a quenching phenomenon by an electrode, for example. Note that the functional layers may each be a single layer or stacked layers.

FIG. 1B is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating an example of the light-emitting layer 130 in FIG. 1A. The light-emitting layer 130 in FIG. 1B includes a host material 131 and a guest material 132.

The host material 131 includes at least an organic compound 131_1. The organic compound 131_1 is preferably a compound having a function of transporting electrons (an electron-transport property), and specifically, a compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. A nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton is preferable because of its high electron-transport property and stability.

It is preferable that the host material 131 further include an organic compound 131_2. The organic compound 131_2 is preferably a compound having a function of transporting holes (a hole-transport property), and specifically, a compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton or a tertiary amine skeleton. A nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton and a tertiary amine skeleton are preferable because of their high hole-transport property and stability.

In the case where the combination of the organic compounds 131_1 and 131_2 is a combination of a compound having an electron-transport property and a compound having a hole-transport property, the carrier balance can be easily controlled depending on the mixture ratio. Specifically, the weight ratio of the compound having an electron-transport property to the compound having a hole-transport property is preferably within a range of 1:9 to 9:1. Since the carrier balance can be easily controlled with the structure, a carrier recombination region can also be controlled easily.

The guest material 132 may be a light-emitting organic compound, and the light-emitting organic compound is preferably a substance capable of emitting fluorescence (hereinafter also referred to as a fluorescent compound) or a substance capable of emitting phosphorescence (hereinafter also referred to as a phosphorescent compound). A structure in which a fluorescent compound or a phosphorescent compound is used as the guest material 132 will be described below. The guest material 132 may be rephrased as the fluorescent compound or the phosphorescent compound.

In the light-emitting element 150 of one embodiment of the present invention, voltage application between the pair of electrodes (the electrodes 101 and 102) allows electrons and holes to be injected from the cathode and the anode, respectively, into the EL layer 100 and thus current flows. By recombination of the injected electrons and holes, excitons are formed. Note that the term “exciton” refers to a pair of carriers (an electron and a hole). Since an exciton has excitation energy, a material where an exciton is formed is brought into an excited state.

When the carriers recombine in the host material 131, excitons are formed to bring the host material 131 into an excited state (a singlet excited state or a triplet excited state). In the case where the guest material 132 is a fluorescent compound, excitation energy transfers from the S1 level of the host material 131 to the S1 level of the guest material 132, thereby forming the singlet excited state of the guest material 132. In the case where the guest material 132 is a phosphorescent compound, excitation energy transfers from the S1 level or the T1 level of the host material 131 to the T1 level of the guest material 132, thereby forming the triplet excited state of the guest material 132. In either case, light is emitted when the guest material 132 in an excited state is deactivated to the ground state.

A characteristic required of the light-emitting element 150 is high emission efficiency. In addition, little reduction in emission efficiency due to long-term preservation or driving, i.e., a long lifetime or high reliability, is required. To make a light-emitting element have high emission efficiency and high reliability, the EL layer 100, specifically the light-emitting layer 130, preferably includes an organic compound with a low content of impurities.

To make the impurity content of an organic compound low, the purity of the organic compound is preferably made high. For example, when a light-emitting element is formed using an organic compound that contains impurities such as a solvent used in the synthesis of the organic compound or impurities contained in the solvent or the like, or using an organic compound that contains elements of raw materials used in the synthesis of the organic compound, the characteristics of the light-emitting element, e.g., driving voltage characteristics, emission efficiency characteristics, and reliability, are poor in some cases. Furthermore, the content of an impurity containing a halogen element, for example, is preferably low because this impurity in particular is influential. Thus, as an organic compound used in a light-emitting element, a material with fewer impurities subjected to purification by sublimation is generally used. The purification by sublimation can remove a solvent remaining after synthesis or a small amount of impurities such as a halide.

However, it is difficult to reduce the content of some impurities because of their molecular structures similar to the molecular structure of the organic compound included in the EL layer 100, for example, so that even a material subjected to purification by sublimation sometimes contains such impurities. Furthermore, even when the content of impurities in the organic compound used for fabrication of a light-emitting element is lowered, impurities might be mixed during the fabrication of the light-emitting element so as to be contained in the light-emitting element. For example, a substance that is generated by decomposition of an organic compound in vacuum evaporation is mixed into the light-emitting element as an impurity in some cases. In addition, when a manufacturing method using a solvent such as a coating method, an ink-jet method, or a printing method is employed, for example, the solvent or an impurity in the solvent is sometimes mixed into a light-emitting element. Furthermore, a substance that is generated by decomposition of an organic compound when a light-emitting element is driven is mixed into the light-emitting element as an impurity in some cases. Therefore, it is difficult to remove all the impurities included in a light-emitting element.

Meanwhile, some impurities do not affect the characteristics of the light-emitting element even when contained in the EL layer 100. The present inventors have found, however, that even such impurities sometimes generate a substance that affects the characteristics of the light-emitting element by interacting with a different compound. Specifically, a substance that affects the characteristics of the light-emitting element is generated by interaction between an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group or a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group and an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. It is thus preferable that in a light-emitting element that includes an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, the content of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group or a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group be low.

<Analysis of Reaction Mechanism Using Quantum Chemistry Calculation> <<Calculation of Mechanism of Reaction Between PCCH and 35DCzPPy>>

Here, a process is described below in which an impurity that affects the characteristics of a light-emitting element is generated by interaction between an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group or a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group and an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton.

To analyze the above process, quantum chemistry calculation was utilized. The structures and abbreviations of compounds used in the calculation are shown below.

In the calculation, a hydrogen atom transfer reaction was analyzed in which interaction between 3-(N-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCCH) and 3,5-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyridine (abbreviation: 35DCzPPy) makes a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH move to 35DCzPPy to generate PCC and 35DCzPPy-H having the above structures.

The calculating method is described below. Note that Gaussian 09 was used as the quantum chemistry computational program. A high performance computer (ICE X, manufactured by SGI Japan, Ltd.) was used for the calculation.

The stable structures in the initial state, the transition state, and the final state for the hydrogen atom transfer reaction in the lowest triplet excited state were calculated using density functional theory (DFT). In addition, vibration analysis was performed for the most stable structure in each state. In the DFT, the total energy is represented as the sum of potential energy, electrostatic energy between electrons, electronic kinetic energy, and exchange-correlation energy including all the complicated interactions between electrons. Also in the DFT, an exchange-correlation interaction is approximated by a functional (a function of another function) of one electron potential represented in terms of electron density to enable high-speed calculations. Here, B3LYP which is a hybrid functional was used to specify the weight of each parameter related to exchange-correlation energy. As a basis function, 6-311G (d,p) was used.

FIG. 2 shows the reaction path and energy diagram that were revealed by the analysis of the hydrogen atom transfer reaction in the lowest triplet excited state.

In FIG. 2, energy in the state where PCCH in the T1 state and 35DCzPPy in the ground state (S0 state) are dissociated infinitely is used as the reference. The activation energy for the reaction in which a hydrogen atom transfers is as low as 0.03 eV, so that the reaction can easily occur at room temperature. Moreover, in the final state after the hydrogen atom transfer, each of PCC and 35DCzPPy-H is in the radical state, the energy in the final state is lower than the energy in the initial state, and this reaction is an exothermic reaction. Therefore, in the case where a molecular arrangement is such that PCCH and 35DCzPPy form a hydrogen bond in a light-emitting layer in a state where a light-emitting element is driven (excited state), there is a possibility of an immediate hydrogen atom transfer reaction. Note that when the activation energy necessary for cleavage in an NH bond in an organic compound with an NH group in an excited state is less than or equal to 0.3 eV, hydrogen is easily dissociated at room temperature.

At this time, PCC and 35DCzPPy-H, which are in the radical state in the final state, have higher energy than PCCH in the S0 state and 35DCzPPy in the S0 state. Accordingly, when a side reaction or the like does not occur, PCC in the radical state and 35DCzPPy-H in the radical state that were generated can return to the original PCCH in the S0 state and the original 35DCzPPy in the S0 state reversibly via thermal deactivation.

This reaction in a light-emitting element including a guest material is considered. In the case where the energy level in the final state (the energy level of each of PCC in the radical state and 35DCzPPy-H in the radical state) is lower than the excitation energy level of the excited state of the guest material, energy transfer from PCC and 35DCzPPy-H to the guest material is prevented. Moreover, when the final state (PCC in the radical state and 35DCzPPy-H in the radical state) and the excited state of the guest material are generated at the same time in this case, excitation energy transfers from the guest material in the excited state to PCC in the radical state and 35DCzPPy-H in the radical state. As a result, light emission from the guest material cannot be obtained and thus, the emission efficiency of the light-emitting element decreases.

Next, the ionization potentials (Ip) and electron affinities (Ea) of the reactants (PCCH and 35DCzPPy) and products (PCC and 35DCzPPy-H) in the above hydrogen atom transfer reaction were calculated. Here, the ionization potentials of PCCH and 35DCzPPy were calculated from a difference between the total energy in the radical cation state and that in the singlet ground state, and the electron affinities were calculated from a difference between the total energy in the singlet ground state and that in the radical anion state. The ionization potentials of PCC and 35DCzPPy-H were calculated from a difference between the total energy in the cation state and that in the radical state, and the electron affinities were calculated from a difference between the total energy in the radical state and that in the anion state. Note that the above calculation was conducted on the assumption of a state where the light-emitting element is driven, i.e., a state where carriers are injected into the molecules.

Table 1 lists the ionization potentials (IP) and electron affinities (Ea) of the compounds that were estimated as described above.

TABLE 1 Molecule PCCH 35DCzPPy PCC 35DCzPPy-H IP (eV) 6.33 6.61 6.39 5.05 Ea (eV) 0.13 0.79 2.39 0.59

The lower the ionization potential, the likelier holes are to enter a molecule. The higher the electron affinity, the likelier electrons are to enter a molecule. In other words, holes are the most likely to enter 35DCzPPy-H and electrons are the most likely to enter PCC.

Next, the energies of the T1 levels when PCC in the radical state accepts electrons to be in the anion state and 35DCzPPy-H in the radical state accepts holes to be in the cation state were calculated. The energies of the T1 levels of the compounds are shown in Table 2. Here, the energy of the T1 level was calculated from the difference between the total energy in the lowest triplet excited state (T1 state) and the total energy in the singlet ground state (S0 state).

TABLE 2 Molecule PCC 35DCCzPPy-H (Anion) (Cation) Ti level (eV) 1.94 1.46

As shown in Table 2, the T1 levels of PCC in the anion state and 35DCzPPy-H in the cation state were found to be as low as 2 eV or less. Thus, in a light-emitting element including a phosphorescent compound that has a higher T1 level than at least one of PCC and 35DCzPPy-H as a guest material, the triplet excitation energies of the host material 131 and the guest material 132 easily transfer to PCC in the anion state or 35DCzPPy-H in the cation state and the excitation energies of the host material 131 and the guest material 132 are easily deactivated.

When PCCH and 35DCzPPy coexist, in an excited state, a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH transfers to 35DCzPPy as described above. In the case of this reaction process, the excitation energy of the host material 131 is easily deactivated without transferring to the guest material 132. The compounds (PCC and 35DCzPPy-H) that are temporarily generated through the hydrogen transfer reaction and are in the charge states (the cation state and the anion state) have a low T1 level in terms of energy; thus, there is a high possibility that this T1 level is lower than the T1 level of the phosphorescent compound used as the guest material 132, which might allow the generated compounds to be a quenching factor in the light-emitting element 150. Furthermore, the generated PCC and 35DCzPPy-H might further react to be substances having a lower energy level through an irreversible reaction that accompanies repetitive excitation, oxidation, and reduction. Accordingly, the hydrogen transfer reaction that proceeds with driving of the light-emitting element 150 sometimes reduces the reliability. Therefore, the content of PCCH in the light-emitting layer 130 that contains 35DCzPPy is preferably low.

The above calculation was conducted on the assumption that PCCH and 35DCzPPy are in the T1 state and the ground state (S0 state), respectively, in the initial state before reaction; however, PCCH and 35DCzPPy may be in the S1 state and the ground state (S0 state), respectively, in the initial state. Since the S1 state is an excited state having higher energy than the T1 state, in a reaction between PCCH in the S1 state and 35DCzPPy in the S0 state, energy in the initial state becomes higher, which facilitates the reaction between PCCH and 35DCzPPy. As a result, also in this case, because of the reaction between PCCH and 35DCzPPy, the excitation energy of the host material 131 is sometimes deactivated without transferring to the guest material 132. The S1 level of the compounds that are temporarily generated through the hydrogen transfer reaction and are in the charge states (the cation state and the anion state) is a low energy level; thus, in the case where the S1 level is lower than the S1 level of the fluorescent compound used as the guest material 132, the generated compounds might be a quenching factor in the light-emitting element 150. Also in this case, the generated PCC and 35DCzPPy-H might further react to be substances having a lower energy level through an irreversible reaction that accompanies repetitive excitation, oxidation, and reduction. Accordingly, the hydrogen transfer reaction that proceeds with driving of the light-emitting element 150 sometimes reduces the reliability. Therefore, even when the guest material 132 is a fluorescent compound, the content of PCCH in the light-emitting layer 130 that contains 35DCzPPy is preferably low.

<<Calculation of Reactivity as a Function of the State of PCCH>>

Next, stabilization energy in desocciation of a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH was calculated for the case where PCCH in the initial state is not in an excited state. In the calculation, on the assumption that PCCH and 35DCzPPy are in any of various states in the initial state and a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated infinitely to be bonded to 35DCzPPy in the final state, the energy difference between the initial state and the final state was calculated as stabilization energy. For the calculation method, the above-described method can be referred to. Table 3 shows the calculation results.

TABLE 3 Energy The difference initial The initial The final The final between the state of state of state of state of initial state and PCCH 35DCzPPy PCC 35DCzPPy-H the final state (eV) S0 S0 Radical Radical 2.28 T1 S0 Radical Radical −0.46 S0 Radical Anion Radical 0.68 anion Radical S0 Radical Cation 1.00 cation

In the case where 35DCzPPy is in the ground state (S0 state) and PCCH is in the ground state (S0 state) or the radical cation state as shown in Table 3, the stabilization energy, which is the energy difference between the initial state and the final state, is higher than 1 eV, thereby inhibiting the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated. In the case where PCCH is in an excited state (T1 state) or 35DCzPPy is in the radical anion state, the stabilization energy, which is the energy difference between the initial state and the final state, is lower than or equal to 1 eV, which facilitates the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated. This reaction easily occurs especially when PCCH is in an excited state (T1 state), i.e., when the stabilization energy is lower than 0 eV. Note that since the S1 state has higher excitation energy than the T1 state, it can be said that the reaction readily occurs also when PCCH is in the S1 state.

Next, calculation was conducted to determine whether or not a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH can be dissociated in the case where PCCH exists alone. Table 4 shows the calculation results.

TABLE 4 The initial The final Energy difference state of state of The final between the initial state PCCH PCC state of H and the final state (eV) S0 Radical Radical 3.66 T1 Radical Radical 0.92 Radical anion Anion Radical 1.40 Radical cation Cation Radical 3.72

As can be seen from Table 4, for the case where PCCH exists alone, the energy difference between each initial state of PCCH and each final state of PCCH was calculated as stabilization energy on the assumption that a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated infinitely in the final state. In that case, except when the initial state of PCCH is the T1 state, the stabilization energy in dissociation of a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is higher than 1 eV. Accordingly, when the initial state of PCCH is a state other than an excited state (the S0 state, radical anion state, or radical cation state), the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated does not easily occur. It is also suggested that the reaction in which a hydrogen atom is dissociated is less likely to occur in the case where the initial state of PCCH is the T1 state because the stabilization energy, although being lower than or equal to 1 eV, is higher than that in the case of coexistence with 35DCzPPy.

In other words, the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated easily occurs especially when 35DCPPy and PCCH coexist.

<<Calculation of Compound that can React with PCCH>>

Next, calculation was conducted to examine the molecular structures of organic compounds that might cause, when coexisting with PCCH in a light-emitting layer, the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated. The structures and abbreviations of compounds used in the calculation are shown below.

The calculation method is similar to that for the calculation of the mechanism of the reaction between PCCH and 35DCzPPy. FIG. 3A shows the reaction path and the energy diagram that were revealed by analysis of the hydrogen atom transfer reaction between PCCH in the T1 state and 2,4,6-tris[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: mCzP3Pm) in the ground state (S0 state). FIG. 3B shows the reaction path and the energy diagram that were revealed by analysis of the hydrogen atom transfer reaction between PCCH in the T1 state and 4,6-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: 4,6mCzP2Pm) in the ground state (S0 state). FIG. 4A shows the reaction path and the energy diagram that were revealed by analysis of the hydrogen atom transfer reaction between PCCH in the T1 state and 2,6-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrazine (abbreviation: 2,6mCzP2Pr) in the ground state (S0 state). FIG. 4B shows the reaction path and the energy diagram that were revealed by analysis of the hydrogen atom transfer reaction between PCCH in the T1 state and 2,4-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-1,3,5-triamidine (abbreviation: mCzP2Tzn) in the ground state (S0 state).

In FIG. 3A, energy in the state where PCCH in the T1 state and mCzP3Pm in the ground state (S0 state) are dissociated infinitely is used as the reference. The activation energy for the reaction in which a hydrogen atom transfers in this system is as low as 0.01 eV, so that the reaction can easily occur at room temperature. Moreover, in the final state after hydrogen atom transfer, each of PCC and mCzP3Pm-H is in the radical state, the energy in the final state is lower than the energy in the initial state, and this reaction is an exothermic reaction. Therefore, in the case where a molecular arrangement is such that PCCH and mCzP3Pm form a hydrogen bond in a light-emitting layer in a state where a light-emitting element is driven (excited state), there is a possibility of a hydrogen atom transfer reaction.

In the case of a combination of PCCH in the T1 state and any of 4,6mCzP2Pm, 2,6mCzP2Pr, and mCzP2Tzn in the ground state (S0 state), there is no barrier due to activation energy in the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH transfers. Accordingly, when a molecular arrangement is such that PCCH and any of these organic compounds form a hydrogen bond, a hydrogen atom transfer reaction occurs immediately. Thus, in FIG. 3B, FIG. 4A, and FIG. 4B, energy in the state where PCCH in the T1 state and any of 4,6mCzP2Pm, 2,6mCzP2Pr, and mCzP2Tzn in the ground state (S0 state) do not interact with each other is used as the reference. Moreover, in the final state after hydrogen atom transfer, PCC and any of 4,6mCzP2Pm-H, 2,6mCzP2Pr-H, and mCzP2Tzn-H are each in the radical state, the energy in the final state is lower than the energy in the initial state, and the reactions are each an exothermic reaction. Therefore, in the case where a molecular arrangement is such that PCCH and any of 4,6mCzP2Pm, 2,6mCzP2Pr, and mCzP2Tzn form a hydrogen bond in a light-emitting layer in a state where a light-emitting element is driven (excited state), there is a possibility of an immediate hydrogen atom transfer reaction.

Next, calculation was conducted to examine the molecular structures of organic compounds that facilitate, when coexisting with PCCH, the reaction in which a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated. The structures and abbreviations of organic compounds used in the calculation are shown below. For the structures and abbreviations of the other compounds, the above description can be referred to.

In the calculation, on the assumption that PCCH (molecule 1) is in the T1 state and each organic compound (molecule 2) is in the ground state (S0 state) in the initial state and that a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH is dissociated to form PCC and the hydrogen atom is bonded to the organic compound (molecule 2) infinitely to be stable in the final state, the energy difference between the initial state and the final state was calculated as stabilization energy. Table 5 and Table 6 show the calculation results. Note that Table 6 also shows the results of calculating the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) level of the molecule 2.

TABLE 5 Energy difference Molecule 1 Molecule 2 between the initial state (T1 state) (S0 state) and the final state (eV) PCCH TCTA 1.73 PCCH mCP 1.59

TABLE 6 LUMO Energy difference level of Molecule 1 Molecule 2 between the initial state molecule (T1 state) (S0 state) and the final state (eV) 2 (eV) PCCH TmPyPB −0.41 −1.44 PCCH 35DCzPPy −0.46 −1.63 PCCH 5,5′mCzP2BPy(3) −0.45 −1.75 PCCH 4,4′mCzP2BPy −0.59 −1.94 PCCH 4,6mCzP2Pm −0.71 −2.28 PCCH mCzP3Pm −0.67 −2.32

Table 5 shows that in coexistence with any of 4,4′,4″-tris(carbazol-9-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TCTA) and 1,3-bis(N-carbazolyl)benzene (abbreviation: mCP) that are organic compounds without a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, stabilization energy in dissociation of a hydrogen atom in the NH group of PCCH is higher than 1 eV and thus a reaction does not easily occur.

In contrast, Table 6 shows that in coexistence with any of 1,3,5-tri[3-(3-pyridyl)phenyl]benzene (abbreviation: TmPyPB), 35DCzPPy, 5,5′-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-3,3′-bipyridine (abbreviation: 5,5′mCzP2BPy(3)), 4,4′-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-2,2′-bipyridine (abbreviation: 4,4′mCzP2BPy), 4,6mCzP2Pm, and mCzP3Pm that are organic compounds having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, stabilization energy in dissociation of a hydrogen atom in the NH group of PCCH is lower than 0 eV, which means an exothermic reaction, and thus a reaction easily occurs.

Next, FIG. 5 shows the correlation between the LUMO level (calculated value) of the organic compound with a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton and the stabilization energy (energy difference between the initial state and the final state) in dissociation of a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH.

As can be seen from FIG. 5, the lower the LUMO level of the organic compound (molecule 2), the lower the stabilization energy in dissociation of a hydrogen atom originating in the NH group of PCCH and the likelier the hydrogen atom is to be dissociated from PCCH.

As suggested above, an organic compound that easily causes dissociation of a hydrogen atom of an NH group when coexisting with PCCH is not limited to 35DCzPPy and is an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton.

The dissociation energy in dissociation of a hydrogen atom from the NH group is nearly independent of the molecular structure other than the NH group. Thus, the organic compound that easily suffers dissociation of a hydrogen atom originating in an NH group is not limited to PCCH. In other words, the above reaction occurs in an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH.

Examples of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group include organic compounds having a pyrrole skeleton with an NH group, an imidazole skeleton with an NH group, a triazole skeleton with an NH group, a tetrazole skeleton with an NH group, and an aromatic amine skeleton with an NH group. Examples of a pyrrole skeleton with an NH group include an indole skeleton and a carbazole skeleton. Examples of the secondary amine skeleton with an NH group and the primary amine skeleton with an NH group include a diarylamine skeleton and a monoarylamine skeleton.

It is thus preferable that when a light-emitting layer of a light-emitting element includes an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, the content of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group, e.g., PCCH, be low.

Specifically, when the organic compound 131_1 has a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the organic compound 131_1 is preferably less than or equal to 0.03, further preferably less than or equal to 0.003 in the light-emitting layer 130. Therefore, the weight ratio of an organic compound that is generated by reaction between an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group and the organic compound 131_1 having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton and that has a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton, a secondary amine skeleton, or a primary amine skeleton in which a nitrogen atom has an unpaired electron to the organic compound 131_1 is preferably less than or equal to 0.03, further preferably less than or equal to 0.003. The weight ratio of an organic compound in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the organic compound 131_1 having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton to the organic compound 131_1 is preferably less than or equal to 0.03, further preferably less than or equal to 0.003.

Note that the abundance can be estimated from, instead of the calculation of the weight ratio, the ratio of the peak that is observed on a longer wavelength side of the absorption spectrum after removal of impurities with a column or the like.

In addition, when the organic compound 131_1 has a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton and the organic compound 131_2 has at least one of a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton and a tertiary amine skeleton, the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the organic compound 131_2 is preferably less than or equal to 0.01, further preferably less than or equal to 0.001 in the light-emitting layer 130. Therefore, the weight ratio of an organic compound that is generated by reaction between an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group and the organic compound 131_1 having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton and that has a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton, a secondary amine skeleton, or a primary amine skeleton in which a nitrogen atom has an unpaired electron to the organic compound 131_2 is preferably less than or equal to 0.01, further preferably less than or equal to 0.001. The weight ratio of an organic compound in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the organic compound 131_1 having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton to the organic compound 131_2 is preferably less than or equal to 0.01, further preferably less than or equal to 0.001.

<Material>

Next, components of a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention are described in detail below.

<<Light-Emitting Layer>>

In the light-emitting layer 130, the host material 131 is present in the largest proportion by weight, and the guest material 132 is dispersed in the host material 131. When the guest material 132 is a fluorescent compound, the S1 level of the host material 131 (the organic compound 131_1 and the organic compound 131_2) in the light-emitting layer 130 is preferably higher than the S1 level of the guest material (the guest material 132) in the light-emitting layer 130. When the guest material 132 is a phosphorescent compound, the T1 level of the host material 131 (the organic compound 131_1 and the organic compound 131_2) in the light-emitting layer 130 is preferably higher than the T1 level of the guest material (the guest material 132) in the light-emitting layer 130.

The organic compound 131_1 is preferably a compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. Specific examples thereof include compounds having any of a pyridine skeleton, a diazine skeleton (a pyrazine skeleton, a pyrimidine skeleton, and a pyridazine skeleton), and a triazine skeleton. As examples of these basic compounds having a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic skeleton, compounds such as a pyridine derivative, a bipyridine derivative, a pyrimidine derivative, a triazine derivative, a quinoxaline derivative, a dibenzoquinoxaline derivative, a phenanthroline derivative, and a purine derivative can be given. As the organic compound 131_1, a material having a property of transporting more electrons than holes (an electron-transport material) can be used, and a material having an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable.

Specific examples include heterocyclic compounds having a pyridine skeleton such as bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen) and bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP); heterocyclic compounds having a diazine skeleton such as 2-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 2mDBTPDBq-II), 2-[3′-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 2mDBTBPDBq-II), 2-[3′-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]dibenzo[t h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 2mCzBPDBq), 2-[4-(3,6-diphenyl-9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 2CzPDBq-III), 7-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 7mDBTPDBq-II), 6-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 6mDBTPDBq-II), 2-[3-(3,9′-bi-9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]dibenzo[f,h]quinoxaline (abbreviation: 2mCzCzPDBq), 4,6-bis[3-(phenanthren-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: 4,6mPnP2Pm), 4,6-bis[3-(4-dibenzothienyl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: 4,6mDBTP2Pm-II), and 4,6-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: 4,6mCzP2Pm); heterocyclic compounds having a triazine skeleton such as 2-{4-[3-(N-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazol-9-yl]phenyl}-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine (abbreviation: PCCzPTzn); and heterocyclic compounds having a pyridine skeleton such as 3,5-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyridine (abbreviation: 35DCzPPy) and 1,3,5-tri[3-(3-pyridyl)phenyl]benzene (abbreviation: TmPyPB). Among the heterocyclic compounds, the heterocyclic compounds having a triazine skeleton, a diazine (pyrimidine, pyrazine, pyridazine) skeleton, or a pyridine skeleton are highly reliable and stable and are thus preferably used. In addition, the heterocyclic compounds having the skeletons have a high electron-transport property to contribute to a reduction in driving voltage. Further alternatively, a high molecular compound such as poly(2,5-pyridinediyl) (abbreviation: PPy), poly[(9,9-dihexylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(pyridine-3,5-diyl)] (abbreviation: PF-Py), or poly[(9,9-dioctylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(2,2′-bipyridine-6,6′-diyl)] (abbreviation: PF-BPy) can be used. The substances described here are mainly substances having an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher. Note that other substances may also be used as long as their electron-transport properties are higher than their hole-transport properties.

The organic compound 131_2 is preferably a compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton or a tertiary amine skeleton. Specific examples thereof include compounds having any of a pyrrole skeleton and an aromatic amine skeleton. As examples, an indole derivative, a carbazole derivative, a triarylamine derivative, and the like can be given. Examples of a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton include an imidazole skeleton, a triazole skeleton, and a tetrazole skeleton. As the organic compound 131_2, a material having a property of transporting more holes than electrons (a hole-transport material) can be used, and a material having a hole mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable. Furthermore, the hole-transport material may be a high molecular compound.

Examples of the aromatic amine compounds that can be used as the material having a high hole-transport property are N,N′-di(p-tolyl)-N,N′-diphenyl-p-phenylenediamine (abbreviation: DTDPPA), 4,4′-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: DPAB), N,N′-bis{4-[bis(3-methylphenyl)amino]phenyl}-N,N′-diphenyl-(1,1′-biphenyl)-4,4′-diamine (abbreviation: DNTPD), 1,3,5-tris[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]benzene (abbreviation: DPA3B), and the like.

Specific examples of the carbazole derivative are 3-[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzDPA1), 3,6-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzDPA2), 3,6-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-(1-naphthyl)amino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzTPN2), 3-[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCA1), 3,6-bis[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCA2), 3-[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)amino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCN1), and the like.

Other examples of the carbazole derivative are 4,4′-di(N-carbazolyl)biphenyl (abbreviation: CBP), 1,3,5-tris[4-(N-carbazolyl)phenyl]benzene (abbreviation: TCPB), 9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: CzPA), 1,4-bis[4-(N-carbazolyl)phenyl]-2,3,5,6-tetraphenylbenzene, and the like.

Furthermore, it is possible to use N,N-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: CzA1PA), 4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: DPhPA), 4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: YGAPA), N,9-diphenyl-N-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: PCAPA), N,9-diphenyl-N-{4-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]phenyl}-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: PCAPBA), N,9-diphenyl-N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: 2PCAPA), 9-phenyl-3-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCzPA), 3,6-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: DPCzPA), N,N,N′,N′,N″,N″,N′″,N′″-octaphenyldiennzo[g,p]chrysene-2,7,10,15-tetraamine (abbreviation: DBC1), or the like.

Other examples are high molecular compounds such as poly(N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK), poly(4-vinyltriphenylamine) (abbreviation: PVTPA), poly[N-(4-{N-[4-(4-diphenylamino)phenyl]phenyl-N-phenylamino}phenyl)methacrylamide] (abbreviation: PTPDMA), and poly[N,N′-bis(4-butylphenyl)-N,N′-bis(phenyl)benzidine] (abbreviation: poly-TPD).

Examples of the material having a high hole-transport property include aromatic amine compounds such as 4,4′-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB or α-NPD), N,N′-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N′-diphenyl-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4,4′-diamine (abbreviation: TPD), 4,4′,4″-tris(carbazol-9-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TCTA), 4,4′,4″-tris[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbreviation: 1′-TNATA), 4,4′,4″-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TDATA), 4,4′,4″-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbreviation: MTDATA), 4,4′-bis[N-(spiro-9,9′-bifluoren-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: BSPB), 4-phenyl-4′-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: BPAFLP), 4-phenyl-3′-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: mBPAFLP), N-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-yl)-N-{9,9-dimethyl-2-[N-phenyl-N-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-yl)amino]-9H-fluoren-7-yl}phenylamine (abbreviation: DFLADFL), N-(9,9-dimethyl-2-diphenylamino-9H-fluoren-7-yl)diphenylamine (abbreviation: DPNF), 2-[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]spiro-9,9′-bifluorene (abbreviation: DPASF), 4-phenyl-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: PCBA1BP), 4,4′-diphenyl-4″-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: PCBBilBP), 4-(1-naphthyl)-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: PCBANB), 4,4′-di(1-naphthyl)-4″-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: PCBNBB), 4-phenyldiphenyl-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)amine (abbreviation: PCA1BP), N,N′-bis(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N,N′-diphenylbenzene-1,3-diamine (abbreviation: PCA2B), N,N,N′-triphenyl-N,N′,N″-tris(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)benzene-1,3,5-triamine (abbreviation: PCA3B), N-(4-biphenyl)-N-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluoren-2-yl)-9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: PCBiF), N-(1,1′-biphenyl-4-yl)-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]-9,9-dimethyl-9H-fluor en-2-amine (abbreviation: PCBBiF), 9,9-dimethyl-N-phenyl-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]fluoren-2-amine (abbreviation: PCBAF), N-phenyl-N-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)phenyl]spiro-9,9′-bifluoren-2-amine (abbreviation: PCBASF), 2-[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]spiro-9,9′-bifluorene (abbreviation: PCASF), 2,7-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]spiro-9,9′-bifluorene (abbreviation: DPA2SF), N-[4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N-(4-phenyl)phenylaniline (abbreviation: YGA1BP), and N,N′-bis[4-(carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N,N′-diphenyl-9,9-dimethylfluorene-2,7-diamine (abbreviation: YGA2F). Other examples are amine compounds, carbazole compounds, and the like such as 3-[4-(1-naphthyl)-phenyl]-9-phenyl-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCPN), 3-[4-(9-phenanthryl)-phenyl]-9-phenyl-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCPPn), 3,3′-bis(9-phenyl-9H-carbazole) (abbreviation: PCCP), 1,3-bis(N-carbazolyl)benzene (abbreviation: mCP), 3,6-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: CzTP), 3,6-di(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-9-phenyl-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PhCzGI), and 2,8-di(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-dibenzothiophene (abbreviation: Cz2DBT). Among the above compounds, compounds having a pyrrole skeleton or an aromatic amine skeleton are preferred because of their high stability and reliability. In addition, the compounds having such skeletons have a high hole-transport property to contribute to a reduction in driving voltage.

As the organic compound 131_2, a compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton such as an imidazole skeleton, a triazole skeleton, or a tetrazole skeleton can be used. Specifically, 3-(4-biphenylyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: TAZ), 9-[4-(4,5-diphenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: CzTAZ1), 2,2′,2″-(1,3,5-benzenetriyl)tris(1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole) (abbreviation: TPBI), 2-[3-(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)phenyl]-1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole (abbreviation: mDBTBIm-II), and the like can be used, for example.

As specific examples of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group, a compound having an NH group and having part of the skeleton of the organic compound 131_2 can be given. In other words, as the examples, the above compounds that have a pyrrole skeleton, an imidazole skeleton, a triazole skeleton, a tetrazole skeleton, a triarylamine skeleton, and the like, can be used as the organic compound 131_2, and have a structure in which hydrogen substitutes for at least one of an aryl group and an alkyl group bonded to nitrogen of the nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton or the tertiary amine skeleton can be given.

Although there is no particular limitation on the guest material 132 in the light-emitting layer 130, as a fluorescent compound, an anthracene derivative, a tetracene derivative, a chrysene derivative, a phenanthrene derivative, a pyrene derivative, a perylene derivative, a stilbene derivative, an acridone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a phenoxazine derivative, a phenothiazine derivative, or the like is preferably used, and for example, any of the following substances can be used.

Specifically, the following examples can be given: 5,6-bis[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-2,2′-bipyridine (abbreviation: PAP2BPy), 5,6-bis[4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)biphenyl-4-yl]-2,2′-bipyridine (abbreviation: PAPP2BPy), N,N′-diphenyl-N,N′-bis[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]pyrene-1,6-diamine (abbreviation: 1,6FLPAPm), N,N′-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N′-bis[3-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]pyrene-1,6-diamine (abbreviation: 1,6mMemFLPAPrn), N,N′-bis[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]-N,N′-bis(4-tert-butylphenyl)pyrene-1,6-diamine (abbreviation: 1,6tBu-FLPAPrn), N,N′-diphenyl-N,N′-bis[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]-3,8-dicyclohexylpyrene-1, 6-diamine (abbreviation: ch-1,6FLPAPrn), N,N′-bis[4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N,N′-diphenylstilbene-4,4′-diamine (abbreviation: YGA2S), 4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: YGAPA), 4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: 2YGAPPA), N,N′-diphenyl-N-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: PCAPA), perylene, 2,5,8,11-tetra(tert-butyl)perylene (abbreviation: TBP), 4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)-4′-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: PCBAPA), N,N′-(2-tert-butylanthracene-9,10-diyldi-4,1-phenylene)bis[N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine] (abbreviation: DPABPA), N,N′-diphenyl-N-[4-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: 2PCAPPA), N-[4-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)phenyl]-N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine (abbreviation: 2DPAPPA), N,N,N′,N′,N″,N″,N′″,N″-octaphenyldibenzo[g,p]chrysene-2,7,10,15-tetraamine (abbreviation: DBC1), coumarin 30, N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-N,N′-diphenyl-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: 2PCAPA), N-[9,10-bis(1,1′-biphenyl-2-yl)-2-anthryl]-N,N′-diphenyl-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: 2PCABPhA), N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine (abbreviation: 2DPAPA), N-[9,10-bis(1,1′-biphenyl-2-yl)-2-anthryl]-N,N′,N′-triphenyl-1,4-phenylenediamine (abbreviation: 2DPABPhA), 9,10-bis(1,1′-biphenyl-2-yl)-N-[4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]-N-phenylanthracen-2-amine (abbreviation: 2YGABPhA), N,N,9-triphenylanthracen-9-amine (abbreviation: DPhAPhA), coumarin 6, coumarin 545T, N,N′-diphenylquinacridone (abbreviation: DPQd), rubrene, 2,8-di-tert-butyl-5,11-bis(4-tert-butylphenyl)-6,12-diphenyltetracene (abbreviation: TBRb), Nile red, 5,12-bis(1,1′-biphenyl-4-yl)-6,11-diphenyltetracene (abbreviation: BPT), 2-(2-{2-[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]ethenyl}-6-methyl-4H-pyran-4-ylidene)propanedinitrile (abbreviation: DCM1), 2-{2-methyl-6-[2-(2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile (abbreviation: DCM2), N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(4-methylphenyl)tetracene-5,11-diamine (abbreviation: p-mPhTD), 7,14-diphenyl-N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(4-methylphenyl)acenaphtho[1,2-a]fluoranthene-3,10-diamine (abbreviation: p-mPhAFD), 2-{2-isopropyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile (abbreviation: DCJTI), 2-{2-tert-butyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile (abbreviation: DCJTB), 2-(2,6-bis{2-[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]ethenyl}-4H-pyran-4-ylidene)propanedinitrile (abbreviation: BisDCM), 2-{2,6-bis[2-(8-methoxy-1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-1H,5H-benzo[ij]quinolizin-9-yl)ethenyl]-4H-pyran-4-ylidene}propanedinitrile (abbreviation: BisDCJTM), and 5,10,15,20-tetraphenylbisbenzo[5,6]indeno[1,2,3-cd: 1′,2′,3′-lm]perylene.

As the guest material 132 (phosphorescent compound), an iridium-, rhodium-, or platinum-based organometallic complex or metal complex can be used; in particular, an organoiridium complex such as an iridium-based ortho-metalated complex is preferable. As an ortho-metalated ligand, a 4H-triazole ligand, a 1H-triazole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a pyridine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyrazine ligand, an isoquinoline ligand, and the like can be given. As the metal complex, a platinum complex having a porphyrin ligand and the like can be given.

Examples of the substance that has an emission peak in the blue or green wavelength range include organometallic iridium complexes having a 4H-triazole skeleton, such as tris{2-[5-(2-methylphenyl)-4-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl-κN2]phenyl-κC}iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mpptz-dmp)₃), tris(5-methyl-3,4-diphenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(Mptz)₃), tris[4-(3-biphenyl)-5-isopropyl-3-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(iPrptz-3b)₃), and tris[3-(5-biphenyl)-5-isopropyl-4-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazolato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(iPr5btz)₃); organometallic iridium complexes having a 1H-triazole skeleton, such as tris[3-methyl-1-(2-methylphenyl)-5-phenyl-1H-1,2,4-triazolato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(Mptz1-mp)₃) and tris(1-methyl-5-phenyl-3-propyl-1H-1,2,4-triazolato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(Prptz1-Me)₃); organometallic iridium complexes having an imidazole skeleton, such as fac-tris[1-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)-2-phenyl-1H-imidazole]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(iPrpmi)₃) and tris[3-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-7-methylimidazo[1,2-f]phenanthridinato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(dmpimpt-Me)₃); and organometallic iridium complexes in which a phenylpyridine derivative having an electron-withdrawing group is a ligand, such as bis[2-(4′,6′-difluorophenyl)pyridinato-N,C^(2′)]iridium(III) tetrakis(1-pyrazolyl)borate (abbreviation: FIr6), bis[2-(4′,6′-difluorophenyl)pyridinato-N,C^(2′)]iridium(III) picolinate (abbreviation: FIrpic), bis{2-[3′,5′-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]pyridinato-N,C^(2′)}iridium(III)picolinate (abbreviation: Ir(CF₃ppy)₂(pic)), and bis[2-(4′,6′-difluorophenyl)pyridinato-N,C^(2′)]iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: FIr(acac)). Among the materials given above, the organometallic iridium complexes including a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton, such as a 4H-triazole skeleton, a 1H-triazole skeleton, or an imidazole skeleton have high triplet excitation energy, reliability, and emission efficiency and are thus especially preferable.

Examples of the substance that has an emission peak in the green or yellow wavelength range include organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrimidine skeleton, such as tris(4-methyl-6-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mppm)₃), tris(4-t-butyl-6-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(tBuppm)₃), (acetylacetonato)bis(6-methyl-4-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mppm)₂(acac)), (acetylacetonato)bis(6-tert-butyl-4-phenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(tBuppm)₂(acac)), (acetylacetonato)bis[4-(2-norbornyl)-6-phenylpyrimidinato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(nbppm)₂(acac)), (acetylacetonato)bis[5-methyl-6-(2-methylphenyl)-4-phenylpyrimidinato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mpmppm)₂(acac)), (acetylacetonato)bis{4,6-dimethyl-2-[6-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-4-pyrimidinyl-N3]phenyl-κC}iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(dmppm-dmp)₂(acac)), and (acetylacetonato)bis(4,6-diphenylpyrimidinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(dppm)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrazine skeleton, such as (acetylacetonato)bis(3,5-dimethyl-2-phenylpyrazinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mppr-Me)₂(acac)) and (acetylacetonato)bis(5-isopropyl-3-methyl-2-phenylpyrazinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mppr-iPr)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexes having a pyridine skeleton, such as tris(2-phenylpyridinato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(ppy)₃), bis(2-phenylpyridinato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(ppy)₂(acac)), bis(benzo[h]quinolinato)iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(bzq)₂(acac)), tris(benzo[h]quinolinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(bzq)₃), tris(2-phenylquinolinato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(pq)₃), and bis(2-phenylquinolinato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(pq)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexes such as bis(2,4-diphenyl-1,3-oxazolato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(dpo)₂(acac)), bis {2-[4′-(perfluorophenyl)phenyl]pyridinato-N,C^(2′)}iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(p-PF-ph)₂(acac)), and bis(2-phenylbenzothiazolato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(bt)₂(acac)); and a rare earth metal complex such as tris(acetylacetonato)(monophenanthroline)terbium(III) (abbreviation: Tb(acac)₃(Phen)). Among the materials given above, the organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrimidine skeleton have distinctively high reliability and light emission efficiency and are thus particularly preferable.

Examples of the substance that has an emission peak in the yellow or red wavelength range include organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrimidine skeleton, such as (diisobutyrylhnethanato)bis[4,6-bis(3-methylphenyl)pyrimidinato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(5mdppm)₂(dibm)), bis[4,6-bis(3-methylphenyl)pyrimidinato](dipivaloylmethanato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(5mdppm)₂(dpm)), and bis[4,6-di(naphthalen-1-yl)pyrimidinato](dipivaloylmethanato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(dlnpm)₂(dpm)); organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrazine skeleton, such as (acetylacetonato)bis(2,3,5-triphenylpyrazinato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(tppr)₂(acac)), bis(2,3,5-triphenylpyrazinato) (dipivaloylmethanato)iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(tppr)₂(dpm)), and (acetylacetonato)bis[2,3-bis(4-fluorophenyl)quinoxalinato]iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(Fdpq)₂(acac)); organometallic iridium complexes having a pyridine skeleton, such as tris(1-phenylisoquinolinato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(piq)₃) and bis(1-phenylisoquinolinato-N,C^(2′))iridium(III) acetylacetonate (abbreviation: Ir(piq)₂(acac)); a platinum complex such as 2,3,7,8,12,13,17,18-octaethyl-21H,23H-porphyrin platinum(II) (abbreviation: PtOEP); and rare earth metal complexes such as tris(1,3-diphenyl-1,3-propanedionato)(monophenanthroline)europium(III) (abbreviation: Eu(DBM)₃(Phen)) and tris[1-(2-thenoyl)-3,3,3-trifluoroacetonato](monophenanthroline)europium(III) (abbreviation: Eu(TTA)₃(Phen)). Among the materials given above, the organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrimidine skeleton have distinctively high reliability and light emission efficiency and are thus particularly preferable. Further, the organometallic iridium complexes having a pyrazine skeleton can provide red light emission with favorable chromaticity.

The light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 130 is preferably a material that can convert the triplet excitation energy into light emission. As an example of the material that can convert the triplet excitation energy into light emission, a thermally activated delayed fluorescence (TADF) material can be given in addition to a phosphorescent compound. Therefore, it is acceptable that the “phosphorescent compound” in the description is replaced with the “thermally activated delayed fluorescence material”. Note that the thermally activated delayed fluorescence material is a material having a small difference between the triplet excitation energy level and the singlet excitation energy level and a function of converting triplet excitation energy into singlet excitation energy by reverse intersystem crossing. Thus, the TADF material can up-convert a triplet excited state into a singlet excited state (i.e., reverse intersystem crossing is possible) using a little thermal energy and efficiently exhibit light emission (fluorescence) from the singlet excited state. The TADF is efficiently obtained under the condition where the difference in energy between the triplet excitation energy level and the singlet excitation energy level is preferably larger than 0 eV and smaller than or equal to 0.2 eV, further preferably larger than 0 eV and smaller than or equal to 0.1 eV.

In the case where the thermally activated delayed fluorescence material is composed of one kind of material, any of the following materials can be used, for example.

First, a fullerene, a derivative thereof, an acridine derivative such as proflavine, eosin, and the like can be given. Furthermore, a metal-containing porphyrin, such as a porphyrin containing magnesium (Mg), zinc (Zn), cadmium (Cd), tin (Sn), platinum (Pt), indium (In), or palladium (Pd), can be given. Examples of the metal-containing porphyrin include a protoporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Proto IX)), a mesoporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Meso IX)), a hematoporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Hemato IX)), a coproporphyrin tetramethyl ester-tin fluoride complex (SnFz(Copro III-4Me)), an octaethylporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(OEP)), an etioporphyrin-tin fluoride complex (SnF₂(Etio I)), and an octaethylporphyrin-platinum chloride complex (PtCl₂(OEP)).

As the thermally activated delayed fluorescence material composed of one kind of material, a heterocyclic compound including a π-electron rich heteroaromatic ring and a π-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring can also be used. Specifically, 2-(biphenyl-4-yl)-4,6-bis(12-phenylindolo[2,3-a]carbazol-11-yl)-1,3,5-triazine (abbreviation: PIC-TRZ), 2-{4-[3-(N-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazol-9-yl]phenyl}-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine (abbreviation: PCCzPTzn), 2-[4-(10 OH-phenoxazin-10-yl)phenyl]-4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine (abbreviation: PXZ-TRZ), 3-[4-(5-phenyl-5,10-dihydrophenazin-10-yl)phenyl]-4,5-diphenyl-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: PPZ-3TPT), 3-(9,9-dimethyl-9H-acridin-10-yl)-9H-xanthen-9-one (abbreviation: ACRXTN), bis[4-(9,9-dimethyl-9,10-dihydroacridine)phenyl]sulfone (abbreviation: DMAC-DPS), 10-phenyl-10H,10′H-spiro[acridin-9,9′-anthracen]-10′-one (abbreviation: ACRSA), or the like can be used. The heterocyclic compound is preferable because of having the π-electron rich heteroaromatic ring and the n-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring, for which the electron-transport property and the hole-transport property are high. Among skeletons having the n-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring, a diazine skeleton (a pyrimidine skeleton, a pyrazine skeleton, or a pyridazine skeleton) and a triazine skeleton have high stability and reliability and are particularly preferable. Among skeletons having the π-electron rich heteroaromatic ring, an acridine skeleton, a phenoxazine skeleton, a thiophene skeleton, a furan skeleton, and a pyrrole skeleton have high stability and reliability; therefore, one or more of these skeletons are preferably included. As the pyrrole skeleton, an indole skeleton, a carbazole skeleton, or a 3-(9-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazole skeleton is particularly preferred. Note that a substance in which the π-electron rich heteroaromatic ring is directly bonded to the π-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring is particularly preferable because the donor property of the π-electron rich heteroaromatic ring and the acceptor property of the π-electron deficient heteroaromatic ring are both increased and the difference between the energy level in the singlet excited state and the energy level in the triplet excited state becomes small.

The light-emitting layer 130 may include a material other than the host material 131 and the guest material 132.

Examples of the material that can be used for the light-emitting layer 130 are, but not limited to, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as anthracene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, chrysene derivatives, and dibenzo[g,p]chrysene derivatives. Specific example of the condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds include 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPAnth), 6,12-dimethoxy-5,11-diphenylchrysene, 9,10-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DPPA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DNA), 2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA), 9,9′-bianthryl (abbreviation: BANT), 9,9′-(stilbene-3,3′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS), 9,9′-(stilbene-4,4′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS2), and 1,3,5-tri(1-pyrenyl)benzene (abbreviation: TPB3). One or more substances having a singlet excitation energy level or a triplet excitation energy level higher than the excitation energy level of the guest material 132 are selected from these substances and known substances.

For example, a compound having a heteroaromatic skeleton, such as an oxadiazole derivative, can be used for the light-emitting layer 130. As specific examples thereof, heterocyclic compounds such as 2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation: PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene (abbreviation: OXD-7), 9-[4-(5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: CO11), and 4,4′-bis(5-methylbenzoxazol-2-yl)stilbene (abbreviation: BzOs) can be given.

In addition, a metal complex (e.g., a zinc- or aluminum-based metal complex) with a heterocycle, for example, can be used for the light-emitting layer 130. As examples, metal complexes having a quinoline ligand, a benzoquinoline ligand, an oxazole ligand, and a thiazole ligand can be given. Specific examples thereof include metal complexes having a quinoline or benzoquinoline skeleton, such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Alq), tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Almq₃), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium(II) (abbreviation: BeBq₂), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: BAlq), and bis(8-quinolinolato)zinc(II) (abbreviation: Znq). Alternatively, a metal complex having an oxazole-based or thiazole-based ligand, such as bis[2-(2-benzoxazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnPBO) or bis[2-(2-benzothiazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnBTZ) can be used.

The light-emitting layer 130 can have a structure in which two or more layers are stacked. For example, in the case where the light-emitting layer 130 is formed by stacking a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer in this order from the hole-transport layer side, the first light-emitting layer is formed using a substance having a hole-transport property as the host material and the second light-emitting layer is formed using a substance having an electron-transport property as the host material. A light-emitting material included in the first light-emitting layer may be the same as or different from a light-emitting material included in the second light-emitting layer. In addition, the materials may have functions of emitting light of the same color or light of different colors. Light-emitting materials having functions of emitting light of different colors are used for the two light-emitting layers, so that light of a plurality of emission colors can be obtained at the same time. It is particularly preferable to select light-emitting materials of the light-emitting layers so that white light can be obtained by combining light emission from the two light-emitting layers.

Note that the light-emitting layer 130 can be formed by an evaporation method (including a vacuum evaporation method), an inkjet method, a coating method, gravure printing, or the like. Besides the above-mentioned materials, an inorganic compound such as a quantum dot or a high molecular compound (e.g., an oligomer, a dendrimer, and a polymer) may be used.

<<Hole-Injection Layer>>

The hole-injection layer 111 has a function of reducing a barrier for hole injection from one of the pair of electrodes (the electrode 101 or the electrode 102) to promote hole injection and is formed using a transition metal oxide, a phthalocyanine derivative, or an aromatic amine, for example. As the transition metal oxide, molybdenum oxide, vanadium oxide, ruthenium oxide, tungsten oxide, manganese oxide, and the like can be given. As the phthalocyanine derivative, phthalocyanine, metal phthalocyanine, and the like can be given. As the aromatic amine, a benzidine derivative, a phenylenediamine derivative, and the like can be given. It is also possible to use a high molecular compound such as polythiophene or polyaniline; a typical example thereof is poly(ethylenedioxythiophene)/poly(styrenesulfonic acid), which is self-doped polythiophene.

As the hole-injection layer 111, a layer containing a composite material of a hole-transport material and a material having a property of accepting electrons from the hole-transport material can also be used. Alternatively, a stack of a layer containing a material having an electron-accepting property and a layer containing a hole-transport material may also be used. In a steady state or in the presence of an electric field, electric charge can be transferred between these materials. As examples of the material having an electron-accepting property, organic acceptors such as a quinodimethane derivative, a chloranil derivative, and a hexaazatriphenylene derivative can be given. A specific example is a compound having an electron-withdrawing group (a halogen group or a cyano group), such as 7,7,8,8-tetracyano-2,3,5,6-tetrafluoroquinodimethane (abbreviation: F₄-TCNQ), chloranil, or 2,3,6,7,10,11-hexacyano-1,4,5,8,9,12-hexaazatriphenylene (abbreviation: HAT-CN). Alternatively, a transition metal oxide such as an oxide of a metal from Group 4 to Group 8 can also be used. Specifically, vanadium oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, chromium oxide, molybdenum oxide, tungsten oxide, manganese oxide, rhenium oxide, or the like can be used. In particular, molybdenum oxide is preferable because it is stable in the air, has a low hygroscopic property, and is easily handled.

A material having a property of transporting more holes than electrons can be used as the hole-transport material, and a material having a hole mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable. Specifically, any of the aromatic amine, carbazole derivative, aromatic hydrocarbon, stilbene derivative, and the like described as examples of the hole-transport material that can be used in the light-emitting layer 130 can be used. Furthermore, the hole-transport material may be a high molecular compound.

As other examples of the hole-transport material, aromatic hydrocarbons such as 2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA), 2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(1-naphthyl)anthracene, 9,10-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DPPA), 2-tert-butyl-9,10-bis(4-phenylphenyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDBA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DNA), 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPAnth), 2-tert-butylanthracene (abbreviation: t-BuAnth), 9,10-bis(4-methyl-1-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DMNA), 2-tert-butyl-9,10-bis[2-(1-naphthyl)phenyl]anthracene, 9,10-bis[2-(1-naphthyl)phenyl]anthracene, 2,3,6,7-tetramethyl-9,10-di(1-naphthyl)anthracene, 2,3,6,7-tetramethyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene, 9,9′-bianthryl, 10,10′-diphenyl-9,9′-bianthryl, 10,10′-bis(2-phenylphenyl)-9,9′-bianthryl, 10,10′-bis[(2,3,4,5,6-pentaphenyl)phenyl]-9,9′-bianthryl, anthracene, tetracene, rubrene, perylene, and 2,5,8,11-tetra(tert-butyl)perylene can be given. Other examples are pentacene, coronene, and the like. The aromatic hydrocarbon having a hole mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher and having 14 to 42 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.

The aromatic hydrocarbon may have a vinyl skeleton. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon having a vinyl group are 4,4′-bis(2,2-diphenylvinyl)biphenyl (abbreviation: DPVBi), 9,10-bis[4-(2,2-diphenylvinyl)phenyl]anthracene (abbreviation: DPVPA), and the like.

Other examples are thiophene compounds, furan compounds, fluorene compounds, triphenylene compounds, phenanthrene compounds, and the like such as 4-{3-[3-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]phenyl}dibenzofuran (abbreviation: mmDBFFLBi-II), 4,4′,4″-(benzene-1,3,5-triyl)tri(dibenzofuran) (abbreviation: DBF3P-II), 1,3,5-tri(dibenzothiophen-4-yl)benzene (abbreviation: DBT3P-II), 2,8-diphenyl-4-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]dibenzothiophene (abbreviation: DBTFLP-III), 4-[4-(9-phenyl-9H-fluoren-9-yl)phenyl]-6-phenyldibenzothiophene (abbreviation: DBTFLP-IV), and 4-[3-(triphenylen-2-yl)phenyl]dibenzothiophene (abbreviation: mDBTPTp-II). Among the above compounds, compounds including a pyrrole skeleton, a furan skeleton, a thiophene skeleton, or an aromatic amine skeleton are preferred because of their high stability and reliability. In addition, the compounds having such skeletons have a high hole-transport property to contribute to a reduction in driving voltage.

<<Hole-Transport Layer>>

The hole-transport layer 112 is a layer containing a hole-transport material and can be formed using any of the hole-transport materials given as examples of the material of the hole-injection layer 111. In order that the hole-transport layer 112 can have a function of transporting holes injected into the hole-injection layer 111 to the light-emitting layer 130, the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) level of the hole-transport layer 112 is preferably equal or close to the HOMO level of the hole-injection layer 111.

As the hole-transport material, a substance having a hole mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferably used. Note that any substance other than the above substances may be used as long as the hole-transport property is higher than the electron-transport property. The layer including a substance having a high hole-transport property is not limited to a single layer, and two or more layers containing the aforementioned substances may be stacked.

<<Electron-Transport Layer>>

The electron-transport layer 118 has a function of transporting, to the light-emitting layer 130, electrons injected from the other of the pair of electrodes (the electrode 101 or the electrode 102) through the electron-injection layer 119. A material having a property of transporting more electrons than holes can be used as the electron-transport material, and a material having an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable. As the compound which easily accepts electrons (the material having an electron-transport property), a π-electron deficient heteroaromatic compound such as a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic compound, a metal complex, or the like can be used, for example. Specifically, the pyridine derivative, the bipyridine derivative, the pyrimidine derivative, the triazine derivative, the quinoxaline derivative, the dibenzoquinoxaline derivative, the phenanthroline derivative, the triazole derivative, the benzimidazole derivative, the oxadiazole derivative, and the like given as the electron-transport materials that can be used in the light-emitting layer 130 can be given. A substance having an electron mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferable. Note that other than these substances, any substance that has a property of transporting more electrons than holes may be used for the electron-transport layer. The electron-transport layer 118 is not limited to a single layer, and may include stacked two or more layers containing the aforementioned substances.

In addition, metal complexes with a heterocycle, such as metal complexes having a quinoline ligand, a benzoquinoline ligand, an oxazole ligand, and a thiazole ligand, can be given. Specific examples thereof include metal complexes having a quinoline or benzoquinoline skeleton, such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Alq), tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Almq₃), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium(II) (abbreviation: BeBq₂), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: BAlq), and bis(8-quinolinolato)zinc(II) (abbreviation: Znq). Alternatively, a metal complex having an oxazole-based or thiazole-based ligand, such as bis[2-(2-benzoxazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnPBO) or bis[2-(2-benzothiazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnBTZ) can be used.

Between the electron-transport layer 118 and the light-emitting layer 130, a layer that controls transfer of electron carriers may be provided. This is a layer formed by addition of a small amount of a substance having a high electron-trapping property to a material having a high electron-transport property described above, and the layer is capable of adjusting carrier balance by suppressing transfer of electron carriers. Such a structure is very effective in preventing a problem (such as a reduction in element lifetime) caused when electrons pass through the light-emitting layer.

<<Electron-Injection Layer>>

The electron-injection layer 119 has a function of reducing a barrier for electron injection from the electrode 102 to promote electron injection and can be formed using a Group 1 metal or a Group 2 metal, or an oxide, a halide, or a carbonate of any of the metals, for example. Alternatively, a composite material containing an electron-transport material (described above) and a material having a property of donating electrons to the electron-transport material can also be used. As the material having an electron-donating property, a Group 1 metal, a Group 2 metal, an oxide of any of the metals, and the like can be given. Specifically, an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or a compound thereof, such as lithium fluoride (LiF), sodium fluoride (NaF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calcium fluoride (CaF₂), or lithium oxide (LiO_(x)), can be used. Alternatively, a rare earth metal compound like erbium fluoride (ErF₃) can be used. Electride may also be used for the electron-injection layer 119. Examples of the electride include a substance in which electrons are added at high concentration to calcium oxide-aluminum oxide. The electron-injection layer 119 can be formed using the substance that can be used for the electron-transport layer 118.

A composite material in which an organic compound and an electron donor (donor) are mixed may also be used for the electron-injection layer 119. Such a composite material is excellent in an electron-injection property and an electron-transport property because electrons are generated in the organic compound by the electron donor. In this case, the organic compound is preferably a material that is excellent in transporting the generated electrons. Specifically, the above-listed substances for forming the electron-transport layer 118 (e.g., the metal complexes and heteroaromatic compounds) can be used, for example. As the electron donor, a substance showing an electron-donating property with respect to the organic compound may be used. Specifically, an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, and a rare earth metal are preferable, and lithium, sodium, cesium, magnesium, calcium, erbium, ytterbium, and the like are given. In addition, an alkali metal oxide or an alkaline earth metal oxide is preferable, and lithium oxide, calcium oxide, barium oxide, and the like are given. A Lewis base such as magnesium oxide can also be used. An organic compound such as tetrathiafulvalene (abbreviation: TTF) can also be used.

Note that the light-emitting layer, the hole-injection layer, the hole-transport layer, the electron-transport layer, and the electron-injection layer described above can each be formed by an evaporation method (including a vacuum evaporation method), an inkjet method, a coating method, a gravure printing method, or the like. Besides the above-mentioned materials, an inorganic compound such as a quantum dot or a high molecular compound (e.g., an oligomer, a dendrimer, and a polymer) may be used in the light-emitting layer, the hole-injection layer, the hole-transport layer, the electron-transport layer, and the electron-injection layer.

<<Quantum Dot>>

A quantum dot is a semiconductor nanocrystal with a size of several nanometers to several tens of nanometers and contains approximately 1×10³ to 1×10⁶ atoms. Since energy shift of quantum dots depend on their size, quantum dots made of the same substance emit light with different wavelengths depending on their size; thus, emission wavelengths can be easily adjusted by changing the size of quantum dots.

Since a quantum dot has an emission spectrum with a narrow peak, emission with high color purity can be obtained. In addition, a quantum dot is said to have a theoretical internal quantum efficiency of approximately 100%, which far exceeds that of a fluorescent organic compound, i.e., 25%, and is comparable to that of a phosphorescent organic compound. Therefore, a quantum dot can be used as a light-emitting material to obtain a light-emitting element having high emission efficiency. Furthermore, since a quantum dot which is an inorganic material has high inherent stability, a light-emitting element which is favorable also in terms of lifetime can be obtained.

Examples of a material of a quantum dot include a Group 14 element, a Group 15 element, a Group 16 element, a compound of a plurality of Group 14 elements, a compound of an element belonging to any of Groups 4 to 14 and a Group 16 element, a compound of a Group 2 element and a Group 16 element, a compound of a Group 13 element and a Group 15 element, a compound of a Group 13 element and a Group 17 element, a compound of a Group 14 element and a Group 15 element, a compound of a Group 11 element and a Group 17 element, iron oxides, titanium oxides, spinel chalcogenides, and semiconductor clusters.

Specific examples include, but are not limited to, cadmium selenide; cadmium sulfide; cadmium telluride; zinc selenide; zinc oxide; zinc sulfide; zinc telluride; mercury sulfide; mercury selenide; mercury telluride; indium arsenide; indium phosphide; gallium arsenide; gallium phosphide; indium nitride; gallium nitride; indium antimonide; gallium antimonide; aluminum phosphide; aluminum arsenide; aluminum antimonide; lead selenide; lead telluride; lead sulfide; indium selenide; indium telluride; indium sulfide; gallium selenide; arsenic sulfide; arsenic selenide; arsenic telluride; antimony sulfide; antimony selenide; antimony telluride; bismuth sulfide; bismuth selenide; bismuth telluride; silicon; silicon carbide; germanium; tin; selenium; tellurium; boron; carbon; phosphorus; boron nitride; boron phosphide; boron arsenide; aluminum nitride; aluminum sulfide; barium sulfide; barium selenide; barium telluride; calcium sulfide; calcium selenide; calcium telluride; beryllium sulfide; beryllium selenide; beryllium telluride; magnesium sulfide; magnesium selenide; germanium sulfide; germanium selenide; germanium telluride; tin sulfide; tin selenide; tin telluride; lead oxide; copper fluoride; copper chloride; copper bromide; copper iodide; copper oxide; copper selenide; nickel oxide; cobalt oxide; cobalt sulfide; iron oxide; iron sulfide; manganese oxide; molybdenum sulfide; vanadium oxide; tungsten oxide; tantalum oxide; titanium oxide; zirconium oxide; silicon nitride; germanium nitride; aluminum oxide; barium titanate; a compound of selenium, zinc, and cadmium; a compound of indium, arsenic, and phosphorus; a compound of cadmium, selenium, and sulfur; a compound of cadmium, selenium, and tellurium; a compound of indium, gallium, and arsenic; a compound of indium, gallium, and selenium; a compound of indium, selenium, and sulfur; a compound of copper, indium, and sulfur; and combinations thereof. What is called an alloyed quantum dot, whose composition is represented by a given ratio, may be used. For example, an alloyed quantum dot of cadmium, selenium, and sulfur is a means effective in obtaining blue light because the emission wavelength can be changed by changing the content ratio of elements.

As the quantum dot, any of a core-type quantum dot, a core-shell quantum dot, a core-multishell quantum dot, and the like can be used. Note that when a core is covered with a shell formed of another inorganic material having a wider band gap, the influence of defects and dangling bonds existing at the surface of a nanocrystal can be reduced. Since such a structure can significantly improve the quantum efficiency of light emission, it is preferable to use a core-shell or core-multishell quantum dot. Examples of the material of a shell include zinc sulfide and zinc oxide.

Quantum dots have a high proportion of surface atoms and thus have high reactivity and easily cohere together. For this reason, it is preferable that a protective agent be attached to, or a protective group be provided at the surfaces of quantum dots. The attachment of the protective agent or the provision of the protective group can prevent cohesion and increase solubility in a solvent. It can also reduce reactivity and improve electrical stability. Examples of the protective agent (or the protective group) include polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers such as polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, and polyoxyethylene oleyl ether; trialkylphosphines such as tripropylphosphine, tributylphosphine, trihexylphosphine, and trioctylphoshine; polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers such as polyoxyethylene n-octylphenyl ether and polyoxyethylene n-nonylphenyl ether; tertiary amines such as tri(n-hexyl)amine, tri(n-octyl)amine, and tri(n-decyl)amine; organophosphorus compounds such as tripropylphosphine oxide, tributylphosphine oxide, trihexylphosphine oxide, trioctylphosphine oxide, and tridecylphosphine oxide; polyethylene glycol diesters such as polyethylene glycol dilaurate and polyethylene glycol distearate; organic nitrogen compounds such as nitrogen-containing aromatic compounds, e.g., pyridines, lutidines, collidines, and quinolines; aminoalkanes such as hexylamine, octylamine, decylamine, dodecylamine, tetradecylamine, hexadecylamine, and octadecylamine; dialkylsulfides such as dibutylsulfide; dialkylsulfoxides such as dimethylsulfoxide and dibutylsulfoxide; organic sulfur compounds such as sulfur-containing aromatic compounds, e.g., thiophene; higher fatty acids such as a palmitin acid, a stearic acid, and an oleic acid; alcohols; sorbitan fatty acid esters; fatty acid modified polyesters; tertiary amine modified polyurethanes; and polyethyleneimines.

Since band gaps of quantum dots are increased as their size is decreased, the size is adjusted as appropriate so that light with a desired wavelength can be obtained. Light emission from the quantum dots is shifted to a blue color side, i.e., a high energy side, as the crystal size is decreased; thus, emission wavelengths of the quantum dots can be adjusted over a wavelength range of a spectrum of an ultraviolet region, a visible light region, and an infrared region by changing the size of quantum dots. The range of size (diameter) of quantum dots which is usually used is 0.5 nm to 20 nm, preferably 1 nm to 10 nm. The emission spectra are narrowed as the size distribution of the quantum dots gets smaller, and thus light can be obtained with high color purity. The shape of the quantum dots is not particularly limited and may be spherical shape, a rod shape, a circular shape, or the like. Quantum rods which are rod-like shape quantum dots have a function of emitting directional light; thus, quantum rods can be used as a light-emitting material to obtain a light-emitting element with higher external quantum efficiency.

In most organic EL elements, to improve emission efficiency, concentration quenching of the light-emitting materials is suppressed by dispersing light-emitting materials in host materials. The host materials need to be materials having singlet excitation energy levels or triplet excitation energy levels higher than or equal to those of the light-emitting materials. In the case of using blue phosphorescent materials as light-emitting materials, it is particularly difficult to develop host materials which have triplet excitation energy levels higher than or equal to those of the blue phosphorescent materials and which are excellent in terms of a lifetime. Even when a light-emitting layer is composed of quantum dots and made without a host material, the quantum dots enable emission efficiency to be ensured; thus, a light-emitting element which is favorable in terms of a lifetime can be obtained. In the case where the light-emitting layer is composed of quantum dots, the quantum dots preferably have core-shell structures (including core-multishell structures).

In the case of using quantum dots as the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer, the thickness of the light-emitting layer is set to 3 nm to 100 nm, preferably 10 nm to 100 nm, and the light-emitting layer is made to contain 1 volume % to 100 volume % of the quantum dots. Note that it is preferable that the light-emitting layer be composed of the quantum dots. To form a light-emitting layer in which the quantum dots are dispersed as light-emitting materials in host materials, the quantum dots may be dispersed in the host materials, or the host materials and the quantum dots may be dissolved or dispersed in an appropriate liquid medium, and then a wet process (e.g., a spin coating method, a casting method, a die coating method, blade coating method, a roll coating method, an ink-jet method, a printing method, a spray coating method, a curtain coating method, or a Langmuir-Blodgett method) may be employed. For a light-emitting layer containing a phosphorescent material, a vacuum evaporation method, as well as the wet process, can be suitably employed.

An example of the liquid medium used for the wet process is an organic solvent of ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone and cyclohexanone; fatty acid esters such as ethyl acetate; halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichlorobenzene; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, mesitylene, and cyclohexylbenzene; aliphatic hydrocarbons such as cyclohexane, decalin, and dodecane; dimethylformamide (DMF); dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO); or the like.

<<Pair of Electrodes>>

The electrodes 101 and 102 function as an anode and a cathode of each light-emitting element. The electrodes 101 and 102 can be formed using a metal, an alloy, or a conductive compound, a mixture or a stack thereof, or the like.

One of the electrode 101 and the electrode 102 is preferably formed using a conductive material having a function of reflecting light. Examples of the conductive material include aluminum (Al), an alloy containing Al, and the like. Examples of the alloy containing Al include an alloy containing Al and L (L represents one or more of titanium (Ti), neodymium (Nd), nickel (Ni), and lanthanum (La)), such as an alloy containing Al and Ti and an alloy containing Al, Ni, and La. Aluminum has low resistance and high light reflectivity. Aluminum is included in earth's crust in large amount and is inexpensive; therefore, it is possible to reduce costs for manufacturing a light-emitting element with aluminum. Alternatively, Ag, an alloy of silver (Ag) and N (N represents one or more of yttrium (Y), Nd, magnesium (Mg), ytterbium (Yb), Al, Ti, gallium (Ga), zinc (Zn), indium (In), tungsten (W), manganese (Mn), tin (Sn), iron (Fe), Ni, copper (Cu), palladium (Pd), iridium (Ir), or gold (Au)), or the like can be used. Examples of the alloy containing silver include an alloy containing silver, palladium, and copper, an alloy containing silver and copper, an alloy containing silver and magnesium, an alloy containing silver and nickel, an alloy containing silver and gold, an alloy containing silver and ytterbium, and the like. Besides, a transition metal such as tungsten, chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), copper, or titanium can be used.

Light emitted from the light-emitting layer is extracted through the electrode 101 and/or the electrode 102. Thus, at least one of the electrode 101 and the electrode 102 is preferably formed using a conductive material having a function of transmitting light. As the conductive material, a conductive material having a visible light transmittance higher than or equal to 40% and lower than or equal to 100%, preferably higher than or equal to 60% and lower than or equal to 100%, and a resistivity lower than or equal to 1×10⁻² Ω·cm can be used.

The electrodes 101 and 102 may each be formed using a conductive material having functions of transmitting light and reflecting light. As the conductive material, a conductive material having a visible light reflectivity higher than or equal to 20% and lower than or equal to 80%, preferably higher than or equal to 40% and lower than or equal to 70%, and a resistivity lower than or equal to 1×10⁻² Ω·cm can be used. For example, one or more kinds of conductive metals and alloys, conductive compounds, and the like can be used. Specifically, a metal oxide such as indium tin oxide (hereinafter, referred to as ITO), indium tin oxide containing silicon or silicon oxide (ITSO), indium oxide-zinc oxide (indium zinc oxide), indium oxide-tin oxide containing titanium, indium titanium oxide, or indium oxide containing tungsten oxide and zinc oxide can be used. A metal thin film having a thickness that allows transmission of light (preferably, a thickness greater than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 30 nm) can also be used. As the metal, Ag, an alloy of Ag and Al, an alloy of Ag and Mg, an alloy of Ag and Au, an alloy of Ag and Yb, or the like can be used.

In this specification and the like, as the material transmitting light, a material that transmits visible light and has conductivity is used. Examples of the material include, in addition to the above-described oxide conductor typified by an ITO, an oxide semiconductor and an organic conductor containing an organic substance. Examples of the organic conductor containing an organic substance include a composite material in which an organic compound and an electron donor (donor) are mixed and a composite material in which an organic compound and an electron acceptor (acceptor) are mixed. Alternatively, an inorganic carbon-based material such as graphene may be used. The resistivity of the material is preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁵ Ω·cm, further preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁴ Ω·cm.

Alternatively, the electrode 101 and/or the electrode 102 may be formed by stacking two or more of these materials.

In order to improve the light extraction efficiency, a material whose refractive index is higher than that of an electrode having a function of transmitting light may be formed in contact with the electrode. The material may be electrically conductive or non-conductive as long as it has a function of transmitting visible light. In addition to the oxide conductors described above, an oxide semiconductor and an organic substance are given as the examples of the material. Examples of the organic substance include the materials for the light-emitting layer, the hole-injection layer, the hole-transport layer, the electron-transport layer, and the electron-injection layer. Alternatively, an inorganic carbon-based material or a metal film thin enough to transmit light can be used. Further alternatively, stacked layers with a thickness of several nanometers to several tens of nanometers may be used.

In the case where the electrode 101 or the electrode 102 functions as the cathode, the electrode preferably contains a material having a low work function (lower than or equal to 3.8 eV). For example, it is possible to use an element belonging to Group 1 or 2 of the periodic table (e.g., an alkali metal such as lithium, sodium, or cesium, an alkaline earth metal such as calcium or strontium, or magnesium), an alloy containing any of these elements (e.g., Ag—Mg or Al—Li), a rare earth metal such as europium (Eu) or Yb, an alloy containing any of these rare earth metals, an alloy containing aluminum and silver, or the like.

When the electrode 101 or the electrode 102 is used as an anode, a material with a high work function (4.0 eV or higher) is preferably used.

The electrode 101 and the electrode 102 may be a stacked layer of a conductive material having a function of reflecting light and a conductive material having a function of transmitting light. In that case, the electrode 101 and the electrode 102 can have a function of adjusting the optical path length so that light of a desired wavelength emitted from each light-emitting layer resonates and is intensified, which is preferable.

As the method for forming the electrode 101 and the electrode 102, a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a printing method, a coating method, a molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) method, a CVD method, a pulsed laser deposition method, an atomic layer deposition (ALD) method, or the like can be used as appropriate.

<<Substrate>>

A light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention may be formed over a substrate of glass, plastic, or the like. As the way of stacking layers over the substrate, layers may be sequentially stacked from the electrode 101 side or sequentially stacked from the electrode 102 side.

For the substrate over which the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention can be formed, glass, quartz, plastic, or the like can be used, for example. Alternatively, a flexible substrate can be used. The flexible substrate means a substrate that can be bent, such as a plastic substrate made of polycarbonate or polyarylate, for example. Alternatively, a film, an inorganic vapor deposition film, or the like can be used. Another material may be used as long as the substrate functions as a support in a manufacturing process of the light-emitting element or an optical element or as long as it has a function of protecting the light-emitting element or an optical element.

In this specification and the like, a light-emitting element can be formed using any of a variety of substrates, for example. The type of a substrate is not limited particularly. Examples of the substrate include a semiconductor substrate (e.g., a single crystal substrate or a silicon substrate), an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a metal substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate including stainless steel foil, a tungsten substrate, a substrate including tungsten foil, a flexible substrate, an attachment film, paper which includes a fibrous material, a base material film, and the like. As an example of a glass substrate, a barium borosilicate glass substrate, an aluminoborosilicate glass substrate, a soda lime glass substrate, and the like can be given. Examples of the flexible substrate, the attachment film, the base material film, and the like are substrates of plastics typified by polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyether sulfone (PES), and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). Another example is a resin such as acrylic. Furthermore, polypropylene, polyester, polyvinyl fluoride, and polyvinyl chloride can be given as examples. Other examples are polyamide, polyimide, aramid, epoxy, an inorganic vapor deposition film, paper, and the like.

Alternatively, a flexible substrate may be used as the substrate such that the light-emitting element is provided directly on the flexible substrate. Further alternatively, a separation layer may be provided between the substrate and the light-emitting element. The separation layer can be used when part or the whole of a light-emitting element formed over the separation layer is separated from the substrate and transferred onto another substrate. In such a case, the light-emitting element can be transferred to a substrate having low heat resistance or a flexible substrate as well. For the above separation layer, a stack including inorganic films, which are a tungsten film and a silicon oxide film, or a structure in which a resin film of polyimide or the like is formed over a substrate can be used, for example.

In other words, after the light-emitting element is formed using a substrate, the light-emitting element may be transferred to another substrate. Example of the substrate to which the light-emitting element is transferred are, in addition to the above substrates, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (including a natural fiber (e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp), a synthetic fiber (e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester), a regenerated fiber (e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester), and the like), a leather substrate, a rubber substrate, and the like. When such a substrate is used, a light-emitting element with high durability, high heat resistance, reduced weight, or reduced thickness can be formed.

The light-emitting element 150 may be formed over an electrode electrically connected to a field-effect transistor (FET), for example, that is formed over any of the above-described substrates. Accordingly, an active matrix display device in which the FET controls the driving of the light-emitting element 150 can be manufactured.

In Embodiment 1, one embodiment of the present invention has been described. Other embodiments of the present invention are described in Embodiments 2 to 9. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. That is, since various embodiments of the present invention are disclosed in Embodiment 1 and Embodiments 2 to 9, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to a specific embodiment. The example in which one embodiment of the present invention is used in a light-emitting element is described; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, depending on circumstances or conditions, one embodiment of the present invention is not necessarily used in a light-emitting element. Furthermore, the example in which the first organic compound, the second organic compound, and the guest material are included, the first organic compound has a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, and the second organic compound has at least one of a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton and a tertiary amine skeleton is described in one embodiment of the present invention, for example; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. Depending on circumstances or conditions, in one embodiment of the present invention, the second organic compound is not necessarily included, for example. Alternatively, the first organic compound does not necessarily have a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. Alternatively, the second organic compound does not necessarily have a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton and a tertiary amine skeleton. Furthermore, the example in which the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group or a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03 is described in one embodiment of the present invention, for example; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. Depending on circumstances or conditions, in one embodiment of the present invention, the weight ratio of the organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group or a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound may be more than 0.03.

The structure described above in this embodiment can be combined with any of the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 2

In this embodiment, a light-emitting element having a structure different from that described in Embodiment 1 and light emission mechanisms of the light-emitting elements will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6C, FIGS. 7A to 7C, and FIGS. 8A to 8C. In FIGS. 6A to 6C, FIGS. 7A to 7C, and FIGS. 8A to 8C, a portion having a function similar to that in FIG. 1A is represented by the same hatch pattern as in FIG. 1A and not especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases. In addition, common reference numerals are used for portions having similar functions, and a detailed description of the portions is omitted in some cases.

<Structure Example 1 of Light-Emitting Element>

FIG. 6A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting element 250.

The light-emitting element 250 illustrated in FIG. 6A includes a plurality of light-emitting units (a light-emitting unit 106 and a light-emitting unit 108 in FIG. 6A) between a pair of electrodes (the electrode 101 and the electrode 102). One of the light-emitting units preferably has the same structure as the EL layer 100. That is, it is preferable that the light-emitting element 150 illustrated in FIGS. 1A and 1B include one light-emitting unit while the light-emitting element 250 include a plurality of light-emitting units. Note that the electrode 101 functions as an anode and the electrode 102 functions as a cathode in the following description of the light-emitting element 250; however, the functions may be interchanged in the light-emitting element 250.

In the light-emitting element 250 illustrated in FIG. 6A, the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108 are stacked, and a charge-generation layer 115 is provided between the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108. Note that the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108 may have the same structure or different structures. For example, it is preferable that a structure similar to that of the EL layer 100 be used in the light-emitting unit 106.

The light-emitting element 250 includes the light-emitting layer 120 and a light-emitting layer 170. The light-emitting unit 106 includes the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 113, and the electron-injection layer 114 in addition to the light-emitting layer 170. The light-emitting unit 108 includes a hole-injection layer 116, a hole-transport layer 117, an electron-transport layer 118, and an electron-injection layer 119 in addition to the light-emitting layer 120.

The charge-generation layer 115 may have either a structure in which an acceptor substance that is an electron acceptor is added to a hole-transport material or a structure in which a donor substance that is an electron donor is added to an electron-transport material. Alternatively, both of these structures may be stacked.

In the case where the charge-generation layer 115 contains a composite material of an organic compound and an acceptor substance, the composite material that can be used for the hole-injection layer 111 described in Embodiment 1 may be used for the composite material. As the organic compound, a variety of compounds such as an aromatic amine compound, a carbazole compound, an aromatic hydrocarbon, and a high molecular compound (such as an oligomer, a dendrimer, or a polymer) can be used. A material having a hole mobility of 1×10⁻⁶ cm²/Vs or higher is preferably used as the organic compound. Note that any other material may be used as long as it has a property of transporting more holes than electrons. Since the composite material of an organic compound and an acceptor substance has excellent carrier-injection and carrier-transport properties, low-voltage driving or low-current driving can be realized. Note that when a surface of a light-emitting unit on the anode side is in contact with the charge-generation layer 115, the charge-generation layer 115 can also serve as a hole-injection layer or a hole-transport layer of the light-emitting unit; thus, a hole-injection layer or a hole-transport layer is not necessarily included in the light-emitting unit. Alternatively, when a surface of the light-emitting unit on the cathode side is in contact with the charge-generation layer 115, the charge-generation layer 115 can also serve as an electron-injection layer or an electron-transport layer of the light-emitting unit; thus, an electron-injection layer or an electron-transport layer is not necessarily included in the light-emitting unit.

The charge-generation layer 115 may have a stacked structure of a layer containing the composite material of an organic compound and an acceptor substance and a layer containing another material. For example, the charge-generation layer 115 may be formed using a combination of a layer containing the composite material of an organic compound and an acceptor substance with a layer containing one compound selected from among electron-donating materials and a compound having a high electron-transport property. Furthermore, the charge-generation layer 115 may be formed using a combination of a layer containing the composite material of an organic compound and an acceptor substance with a layer containing a transparent conductive film.

The charge-generation layer 115 provided between the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108 is configured so that electrons are injected into one of the light-emitting units and holes are injected into the other light-emitting unit when a voltage is applied between the electrode 101 and the electrode 102. For example, in FIG. 6A, the charge-generation layer 115 injects electrons into the light-emitting unit 106 and holes into the light-emitting unit 108 when a voltage is applied such that the potential of the electrode 101 is higher than that of the electrode 102.

Note that in terms of light extraction efficiency, the charge-generation layer 115 preferably has a visible light transmittance (specifically, a visible light transmittance of higher than or equal to 40%). The charge-generation layer 115 functions even when having lower conductivity than the pair of electrodes (the electrodes 101 and 102).

The charge-generation layer 115 formed by using any of the above materials can suppress an increase in driving voltage caused by the stack of the light-emitting layers.

Although FIG. 6A illustrates the light-emitting element including the two light-emitting units, the light-emitting element can include three or more light-emitting units stacked. With a plurality of light-emitting units between a pair of electrodes, which are partitioned by the charge-generation layer as in the light-emitting element 250, it is possible to provide a light-emitting element which can emit high-luminance light with the current density kept low, has a long lifetime, and consumes low power.

When the structure described in Embodiment 1 is used for at least one of the plurality of units, a light-emitting element with a high emission efficiency and a light-emitting element with high reliability can be provided.

In the description of this embodiment, the light-emitting layer 170 of the light-emitting unit 106 has the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1. In that case, the light-emitting element 250 has high emission efficiency and high reliability.

The light-emitting layer 120 included in the light-emitting unit 108 contains a host material 121 and a guest material 122 as illustrated in FIG. 6B. Note that the guest material 122 is described below as a fluorescent compound.

<<Light Emission Mechanism of Light-Emitting Layer 120>>

The light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 120 is described below.

By recombination of the electrons and holes injected from the pair of electrodes (the electrode 101 and the electrode 102) or the charge-generation layer 115 in the light-emitting layer 120, excitons are formed. Because the amount of the host material 121 is larger than that of the guest material 122, most of the excited states formed by the exciton generation are those of the host material 121.

Note that the term “exciton” refers to a carrier (electron and hole) pair. Since excitons have energy, a material where excitons are generated is brought into an excited state.

In the case where the formed excited state of the host material 121 is a singlet excited state, singlet excitation energy transfers from the S1 level of the host material 121 to the S level of the guest material 122, thereby forming the singlet excited state of the guest material 122.

Since the guest material 122 is a fluorescent compound, when a singlet excited state is formed in the guest material 122, the guest material 122 immediately emits light. To obtain high light emission efficiency in this case, the fluorescence quantum yield of the guest material 122 is preferably high. The same can apply to a case where a singlet excited state is formed by recombination of carriers in the guest material 122.

Next, a case where recombination of carriers forms a triplet excited state of the host material 121 is described. The correlation of energy levels of the host material 121 and the guest material 122 in this case is shown in FIG. 6C. The following explains what terms and signs in FIG. 6C represent. Note that because it is preferable that the T1 level of the host material 121 be lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122, FIG. 6C shows this preferable case. However, the T1 level of the host material 121 may be higher than the T1 level of the guest material 122.

Host (121): the host material 121;

Guest (122): the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound);

S_(FH): the S1 level of the host material 121;

T_(FH): the T1 level of the host material 121;

S_(FG): the S1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound); and

T_(FG): the T1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound).

As illustrated in FIG. 6C, triplet-triplet annihilation (TTA) occurs, that is, triplet excitons formed by carrier recombination interact with each other, and excitation energy is transferred and spin angular momenta are exchanged; as a result, a reaction in which the triplet excitons are converted into singlet excitons having energy of the S1 level of the host material 121 (S_(FH)) (see TTA in FIG. 6C). The singlet excitation energy of the host material 121 is transferred from S_(FH) to the S1 level of the guest material 122 (S_(FG)) having a lower energy than S_(FH) (see Route E₅ in FIG. 6C), and a singlet excited state of the guest material 122 is formed, whereby the guest material 122 emits light.

Note that in the case where the density of triplet excitons in the light-emitting layer 120 is sufficiently high (e.g., 1×10¹² cm⁻³ or higher), only the reaction of two triplet excitons close to each other can be considered whereas deactivation of a single triplet exciton can be ignored.

In the case where a triplet excited state of the guest material 122 is formed by carrier recombination, the triplet excited state of the guest material 122 is thermally deactivated and is difficult to use for light emission. However, in the case where the T1 level of the host material 121 (T_(FH)) is lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122 (T_(FG)), the triplet excitation energy of the guest material 122 can be transferred from the T1 level of the guest material 122 (T_(FG)) to the T1 level of the host material 121 (T_(FH)) (see Route E₆ in FIG. 6C) and then is utilized for TTA.

In other words, the host material 121 preferably has a function of converting triplet excitation energy into singlet excitation energy by causing TTA, so that the triplet excitation energy generated in the light-emitting layer 120 can be partly converted into singlet excitation energy by TTA in the host material 121. The singlet excitation energy can be transferred to the guest material 122 and extracted as fluorescence. In order to achieve this, the S1 level of the host material 121 (S_(FH)) is preferably higher than the S1 level of the guest material 122 (S_(FG)). In addition, the T1 level of the host material 121 (T_(FH)) is preferably lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122 (T_(FG)).

Note that particularly in the case where the T1 level (T_(FG)) of the guest material 122 is lower than the T1 level (T_(FH)) of the host material 121, the weight ratio of the guest material 122 to the host material 121 is preferably low. Specifically, the weight ratio of the guest material 122 to the host material 121 is preferably greater than 0 and less than or equal to 0.05, in which case the probability of carrier recombination in the guest material 122 can be reduced. In addition, the probability of energy transfer from the T1 level (T_(FH)) of the host material 121 to the T1 level (T_(FG)) of the guest material 122 can be reduced.

Note that the host material 121 may be composed of a single compound or a plurality of compounds.

In the case where the light-emitting units 106 and 108 contain guest materials with different emission colors, light emitted from the light-emitting layer 120 preferably has an emission peak on the shorter wavelength side than light emitted from the light-emitting layer 170. Since the luminance of a light-emitting element using a material having a high triplet excitation energy level tends to be degraded quickly, TTA is utilized in the light-emitting layer emitting light with a short wavelength so that a light-emitting element with less degradation of luminance can be provided.

Note that the light-emitting layer 170 can have any of the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1 and the structure of the light-emitting layer 120.

<Structure Example 2 of Light-Emitting Element>

FIG. 7A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting element 252.

The light-emitting element 252 illustrated in FIG. 7A includes, like the light-emitting element 250 described above, a plurality of light-emitting units (the light-emitting unit 106 and a light-emitting unit 110 in FIG. 7A) between a pair of electrodes (the electrode 101 and the electrode 102). At least one of the light-emitting units has a structure similar to that of the EL layer 100. Note that the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 110 may have the same structure or different structures.

In the light-emitting element 252 illustrated in FIG. 7A, the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 110 are stacked, and the charge-generation layer 115 is provided between the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 110. For example, it is preferable that a structure similar to that of the EL layer 100 be used in the light-emitting unit 106.

The light-emitting element 252 includes a light-emitting layer 140 and the light-emitting layer 170. The light-emitting unit 106 includes the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 113, and the electron-injection layer 114 in addition to the light-emitting layer 170. The light-emitting unit 110 includes the hole-injection layer 116, the hole-transport layer 117, the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 in addition to the light-emitting layer 140.

When the structure described in Embodiment 1 is used for at least one of the plurality of units, a light-emitting element with a high emission efficiency and a light-emitting element with high reliability can be provided.

In addition, the light-emitting layer of the light-emitting unit 110 preferably contains a phosphorescent compound. In other words, it is preferable that the light-emitting layer 140 included in the light-emitting unit 110 include a phosphorescent compound, and the light-emitting layer 170 included in the light-emitting unit 106 have the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1. A structure example of the light-emitting element 252 in this case is described below.

The light-emitting layer 140 included in the light-emitting unit 110 includes a host material 141 and a guest material 142 as illustrated in FIG. 7B. The host material 141 includes an organic compound 141_1 and an organic compound 141_2. In the following description, the guest material 142 included in the light-emitting layer 140 is a phosphorescent compound.

<<Light Emission Mechanism of Light-Emitting Layer 140>>

Next, the light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 140 is described below.

The organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 which are included in the light-emitting layer 140 preferably form an exciplex.

Although it is acceptable as long as the combination of the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 can form an exciplex, it is preferable that one of them be a compound having a hole-transport property and the other be a compound having an electron-transport property.

FIG. 7C shows a correlation between the energy levels of the organic compound 141_1, the organic compound 141_2, and the guest material 142 in the light-emitting layer 140. The following explains what terms and numerals in FIG. 7C represent:

Host (141_1): the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

Host (141_2): the organic compound 141_2 (host material);

Guest (142): the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound);

S_(PH1): the S1 level of the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

T_(PH1): the T1 level of the organic compound 141_1 (host material);

S_(PH2): the S1 level of the organic compound 141_2 (host material);

T_(PH2): the T1 level of the organic compound 141_2 (host material);

T_(PG): the T1 level of the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound);

S_(PE): the S1 level of the exciplex; and

T_(PE): the T1 level of the exciplex.

The organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 form an exciplex, and the S1 level (S_(PE)) and the T1 level (T_(PE)) of the exciplex are energy levels close to each other (see Route E₇ in FIG. 7C).

One of the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 receives a hole and the other receives an electron to readily form an exciplex. Alternatively, when one of the organic compounds is brought into an excited state, the other immediately interacts with the one to form an exciplex. Consequently, most excitons in the light-emitting layer 140 exist as exciplexes. Because the excitation energy levels (S_(PE) and T_(PE)) of the exciplex are lower than the S1 levels (S_(PH1) and S_(PH2)) of the host materials (the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2) that form the exciplex, the excited state of the host material 141 can be formed with lower excitation energy. This can reduce the driving voltage of the light emitting element.

Both energies of S_(PE) and T_(PE) of the exciplex are then transferred to the T1 level of the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound); thus, light emission is obtained (see Routes E₈ and E₉ in FIG. 7C).

Furthermore, the T1 level (T_(PE)) of the exciplex is preferably higher than the T1 level (T_(PG)) of the guest material 142. In this way, the singlet excitation energy and the triplet excitation energy of the formed exciplex can be transferred from the S1 level (S_(PE)) and the T1 level (T_(PE)) of the exciplex to the T1 level (T_(PG)) of the guest material 142.

Note that in order to efficiently transfer excitation energy from the exciplex to the guest material 142, the T1 level (T_(PE)) of the exciplex is preferably lower than or equal to the T1 levels (T_(PH1) and T_(PH2)) of the organic compounds (the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2) which form the exciplex. Thus, quenching of the triplet excitation energy of the exciplex due to the organic compounds (the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2) is less likely to occur, resulting in efficient energy transfer from the exciplex to the guest material 142.

In order to efficiently form an exciplex by the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2, it is preferable to satisfy the following: the HOMO level of one of the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 is higher than that of the other and the LUMO level of the one of the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2 is higher than that of the other. For example, when the organic compound 141_1 has a hole-transport property and the organic compound 141_2 has an electron-transport property, it is preferable that the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_1 be higher than the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_2 and the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_1 be higher than the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_2. Alternatively, when the organic compound 141_2 has a hole-transport property and the organic compound 141_1 has an electron-transport property, it is preferable that the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_2 be higher than the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_1 and the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_2 be higher than the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_1. Specifically, the energy difference between the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_1 and the HOMO level of the organic compound 141_2 is preferably greater than or equal to 0.05 eV, further preferably greater than or equal to 0.1 eV, and still further preferably greater than or equal to 0.2 eV. Alternatively, the energy difference between the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_1 and the LUMO level of the organic compound 141_2 is preferably greater than or equal to 0.05 eV, more preferably greater than or equal to 0.1 eV, and still more preferably greater than or equal to 0.2 eV.

In the case where the combination of the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2 is a combination of a compound having a hole-transport property and a compound having an electron-transport property, the carrier balance can be easily controlled by adjusting the mixture ratio. Specifically, the weight ratio of the compound having a hole-transport property to the compound having an electron-transport property is preferably within a range of 1:9 to 9:1. Since the carrier balance can be easily controlled with the structure, a carrier recombination region can also be controlled easily.

<Energy Transfer Mechanism>

Next, factors controlling the processes of intermolecular energy transfer between the host material 141 and the guest material 142 will be described. As mechanisms of the intermolecular energy transfer, two mechanisms, i.e., Förster mechanism (dipole-dipole interaction) and Dexter mechanism (electron exchange interaction), have been proposed. Although the intermolecular energy transfer process between the host material 141 and the guest material 142 is described below, the same applies to the case where the host material 141 is an exciplex.

<<Förster Mechanism>>

In Förster mechanism, energy transfer does not require direct contact between molecules and energy is transferred through a resonant phenomenon of dipolar oscillation between the host material 141 and the guest material 142. By the resonant phenomenon of dipolar oscillation, the host material 141 provides energy to the guest material 142, and thus, the host material 141 in an excited state is brought to a ground state and the guest material 142 in a ground state is brought to an excited state. Note that the rate constant k_(h*→g) of Förster mechanism is expressed by Formula (1).

$\begin{matrix} {\left\lbrack {{Formula}\mspace{14mu} 1} \right\rbrack \mspace{625mu}} & \; \\ {k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g} = {\frac{9000c^{4}K^{2}\varphi \; {{ln1}0}}{128\; \pi^{5}n^{4}N\; \tau \; R^{6}}{\int{\frac{{{f^{\prime}}_{h}(v)}{ɛ_{g}(v)}}{v^{4}}{dv}}}}} & (1) \end{matrix}$

In Formula (1), ν denotes a frequency, f_(h)(ν) denotes a normalized emission spectrum of the host material 141 (a fluorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and a phosphorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a triplet excited state), ε_(g)(ν) denotes a molar absorption coefficient of the guest material 142, N denotes Avogadro's number, n denotes a refractive index of a medium, R denotes an intermolecular distance between the host material 141 and the guest material 142, τ denotes a measured lifetime of an excited state (fluorescence lifetime or phosphorescence lifetime), c denotes the speed of light, φ denotes an emission quantum yield (a fluorescence quantum yield in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and a phosphorescence quantum yield in energy transfer from a triplet excited state), and K² denotes a coefficient (0 to 4) of orientation of a transition dipole moment between the host material 141 and the guest material 142. Note that K² is ⅔ in random orientation.

<<Dexter Mechanism>>

In Dexter mechanism, the host material 141 and the guest material 142 are close to a contact effective range where their orbitals overlap, and the host material 141 in an excited state and the guest material 142 in a ground state exchange their electrons, which leads to energy transfer. Note that the rate constant k_(h*→g) of Dexter mechanism is expressed by Formula (2).

$\begin{matrix} {\left\lbrack {{Formula}{\mspace{11mu} \;}2} \right\rbrack \mspace{619mu}} & \; \\ {k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g} = {\left( \frac{2\pi}{h} \right)K^{2}{\exp \left( {- \frac{2R}{L}} \right)}{\int{{{f^{\prime}}_{h}(v)}{{ɛ^{\prime}}_{g}(v)}{dv}}}}} & (2) \end{matrix}$

In Formula (2), h denotes a Planck constant, K denotes a constant having an energy dimension, ν denotes a frequency, f′_(h)(ν) denotes a normalized emission spectrum of the host material 141 (a fluorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and a phosphorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a triplet excited state), ε′_(g)(ν) denotes a normalized absorption spectrum of the guest material 142, L denotes an effective molecular radius, and R denotes an intermolecular distance between the host material 141 and the guest material 142.

Here, the efficiency of energy transfer from the host material 141 to the guest material 142 (energy transfer efficiency φ_(ET)) is expressed by Formula (3). In the formula, k_(r) denotes a rate constant of a light-emission process (fluorescence in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and phosphorescence in energy transfer from a triplet excited state) of the host material 141, k_(n) denotes a rate constant of a non-light-emission process (thermal deactivation or intersystem crossing) of the host material 141, and t denotes a measured lifetime of an excited state of the host material 141.

$\begin{matrix} {\left\lbrack {{Formula}{\mspace{11mu} \;}3} \right\rbrack \mspace{619mu}} & \; \\ {\varphi_{ET} = {\frac{k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}}{k_{r} + k_{n} + k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}} = \frac{k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}}{\; {\left( \frac{1}{\tau} \right) + k_{h^{*}\rightarrow g}}}}} & (3) \end{matrix}$

According to Formula (3), it is found that the energy transfer efficiency φ_(ET) can be increased by increasing the rate constant k_(h*→g) of energy transfer so that another competing rate constant k_(r)+k_(n) (=1/τ) becomes relatively small.

<<Concept for Promoting Energy Transfer>>

In energy transfer by Förster mechanism, high energy transfer efficiency φ_(ET) is obtained when an emission quantum yield φ (a fluorescence quantum yield in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and a phosphorescence quantum yield in energy transfer from a triplet excited state) is high. Furthermore, it is preferable that the emission spectrum (the fluorescence spectrum in energy transfer from the singlet excited state) of the host material 141 have a large overlap with the absorption spectrum (absorption corresponding to the transition from the singlet ground state to the triplet excited state) of the guest material 142. Moreover, it is preferable that the molar absorption coefficient of the guest material 142 be also high. This means that the emission spectrum of the host material 141 overlaps with the absorption band of the guest material 142 that is on the longest wavelength side.

In energy transfer by Dexter mechanism, in order to increase the rate constant k_(h*→g), it is preferable that an emission spectrum of the host material 141 (a fluorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a singlet excited state, and a phosphorescent spectrum in energy transfer from a triplet excited state) have a large overlap with an absorption spectrum of the guest material 142 (absorption corresponding to transition from a singlet ground state to a triplet excited state). Therefore, the energy transfer efficiency can be optimized by making the emission spectrum of the host material 141 overlap with the absorption band of the guest material 142 which is on the longest wavelength side.

In a manner similar to that of the energy transfer from the host material 141 to the guest material 142, the energy transfer by both Förster mechanism and Dexter mechanism also occurs in the energy transfer process from the exciplex to the guest material 142.

That is, the host material 141 includes the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2 which are a combination for forming an exciplex functioning as an energy donor capable of efficiently transferring energy to the guest material 142. The excitation energy for forming the exciplex by the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2 can be lower than the excitation energy of the organic compound 141_1 in the excited state and lower than the excitation energy of the organic compound 141_2 in the excited state. This results in a reduction in the driving voltage of the light-emitting element.

Furthermore, in order to facilitate the energy transfer from the S1 level of the exciplex to the T1 level of the guest material 142 serving as an energy acceptor, it is preferable that the emission spectrum of the exciplex overlap with the absorption band of the guest material 142 which is on the longest wavelength side (lowest energy side). Thus, the efficiency of generating the triplet excited state of the guest material 142 can be increased.

The exciplex generated in the light-emitting layer 140 has a feature in that the singlet excitation energy level is close to the triplet excitation energy level. Therefore, by overlapping the emission spectrum of the exciplex and the absorption band of the guest material 142 which is on the longest wavelength side (lowest energy side), energy can be easily transferred from the triplet excitation energy level of the exciplex to the triplet excitation energy level of the guest material 142.

When the light-emitting layer 140 has the above-described structure, light emission from the guest material 142 (the phosphorescent compound) of the light-emitting layer 140 can be obtained efficiently.

Note that the above-described processes through Routes E₇ to E₉ may be referred to as exciplex-triplet energy transfer (ExTET) in this specification and the like. In other words, in the light-emitting layer 140, excitation energy is transferred from the exciplex to the guest material 142. In this case, the efficiency of reverse intersystem crossing from T_(PE) to S_(PE) does not need to be high and the emission quantum yield from S_(PE) do not need to be high either; thus, materials can be selected from a wide range of options.

Note that the light-emitting layer 170 can have any of the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1 and the structure of the light-emitting layer 140.

Note that in each of the above-described structures, the emission colors of the guest materials used in the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108 or in the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 110 may be the same or different. In the case where the same guest materials emitting light of the same color are used for the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108 or for the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 110, the light-emitting element 250 and the light-emitting element 252 can exhibit high emission luminance at a small current value, which is preferable. In the case where guest materials emitting light of different colors are used for the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 108 or for the light-emitting unit 106 and the light-emitting unit 110, the light-emitting element 250 and the light-emitting element 252 can exhibit multi-color light emission, which is preferable. In that case, when a plurality of light-emitting materials with different emission wavelengths are used in one or both of the light-emitting layers 120 and 170 or in one or both of the light-emitting layers 140 and 170, lights with different emission peaks synthesize light emission from the light-emitting element 250 and the light-emitting element 252. That is, the emission spectrum of the light-emitting element 250 has at least two maximum values.

The above structure is also suitable for obtaining white light emission. When the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 170 or the light-emitting layer 140 and the light-emitting layer 170 emit light of complementary colors, white light emission can be obtained. It is particularly favorable to select the guest materials so that white light emission with high color rendering properties or light emission of at least red, green, and blue can be obtained.

At least one of the light-emitting layers 120, 140, and 170 may be further divided into layers and the divided layers may contain different light-emitting materials. That is, at least one of the light-emitting layers 120, 140, and 170 may consist of two or more layers. For example, in the case where the light-emitting layer is formed by stacking a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer in this order from the hole-transport layer side, the first light-emitting layer is formed using a material having a hole-transport property as the host material and the second light-emitting layer is formed using a material having an electron-transport property as the host material. In that case, a light-emitting material included in the first light-emitting layer may be the same as or different from a light-emitting material included in the second light-emitting layer. In addition, the materials may have functions of emitting light of the same color or light of different colors. White light emission with a high color rendering property that is formed of three primary colors or four or more colors can be obtained by using a plurality of light-emitting materials emitting light of different colors.

<Structure Example 3 of Light-Emitting Element>

Next, a structure example different from that of the light-emitting elements illustrated in FIGS. 6A to 6C and FIGS. 7A to 7C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 8A to 8C.

FIG. 8A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light-emitting element 254.

In the light-emitting element 254 shown in FIG. 8A, an EL layer 100 is provided between a pair of electrodes (the electrodes 101 and 102). Note that the electrode 101 functions as an anode and the electrode 102 functions as a cathode in the following description of the light-emitting element 254; however, the functions may be interchanged in the light-emitting element 254.

The EL layer 100 includes a light-emitting layer 180. The light-emitting layer 180 includes the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140. In the light-emitting element 254, as the EL layer 100, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 are illustrated in addition to the light-emitting layers. However, this stacked structure is an example, and the structure of the EL layer 100 in the light-emitting element 254 is not limited thereto. For example, the stacking order of the above layers of the EL layer 100 may be changed. Alternatively, in the EL layer 100, another functional layer other than the above layers may be provided. The functional layer may have a function of lowering a hole- or electron-injection barrier, a function of improving a hole- or electron-transport property, a function of inhibiting transport of holes or electrons, or a function of generating holes or electrons, for example.

As illustrated in FIG. 8B, the light-emitting layer 120 contains the host material 121 and the guest material 122. The light-emitting layer 140 contains the host material 141 and the guest material 142. The host material 141 includes the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2. Note that in the description below, the guest material 122 is a fluorescent compound and the guest material 142 is a phosphorescent compound.

Note that at least one of the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 preferably has the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1.

<<Light Emission Mechanism of Light-Emitting Layer 180>>

The light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 120 is similar to that of the light-emitting layer 120 illustrated in FIGS. 6B and 6C. The light emission mechanism of the light-emitting layer 140 is similar to that of the light-emitting layer 140 illustrated in FIGS. 7B and 7C.

In the case where the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 are in contact with each other as illustrated in FIG. 8A, even when energy (in particular, triplet excitation energy) is transferred from the exciplex of the light-emitting layer 140 to the host material 121 of the light-emitting layer 120 at an interface between the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140, triplet excitation energy can be converted into light emission in the light-emitting layer 120.

Note that the T1 level of the host material 121 of the light-emitting layer 120 is preferably lower than the T1 levels of the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2 of the light-emitting layer 140. In the light-emitting layer 120, the S1 level of the host material 121 is preferably higher than the S1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) while the T1 level of the host material 121 is preferably lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound).

FIG. 8C shows a correlation of energy levels in the case where TTA is utilized in the light-emitting layer 120 and ExTET is utilized in the light-emitting layer 140. The following explains what terms and numerals in FIG. 8C represent:

Fluorescence EML (120): the light-emitting layer 120 (fluorescent light-emitting layer);

Phosphorescence EML (140): the light-emitting layer 140 (phosphorescent light-emitting layer);

Host (121): the host material 121;

Guest (122): the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound);

Host (141_1): the host material (the organic compound 141_1);

Guest (142): the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound);

Exciplex: an exciplex (the organic compound 141_1 and the organic compound 141_2);

S_(FH): the S1 level of the host material 121;

T_(FH): the T1 level of the host material 121;

S_(FG): the S1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound);

T_(FG): the T1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound);

S_(PH): the S1 level of the host material (the organic compound 141_1);

T_(PH): the T1 level of the host material (the organic compound 141_1);

T_(PG): the T1 level of the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound);

S_(E): the S1 level of the exciplex; and

T_(E): the T1 level of the exciplex.

As shown in FIG. 8C, the exciplex exists only in an excited state; thus, exciton diffusion between the exciplexes is less likely to occur. In addition, because the excitation energy levels (S_(E) and T_(E)) of the exciplex are lower than the excitation energy levels (S_(PH) and T_(PH)) of the organic compound 141_1 (i.e., the host material of the phosphorescent compound) of the light-emitting layer 140, energy diffusion from the exciplex to the organic compound 141_1 does not occur. That is, the efficiency of the phosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 140) can be maintained because an exciton diffusion distance of the exciplex is short in the phosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 140). In addition, even when part of the triplet excitation energy of the exciplex of the phosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 140) diffuses into the fluorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 120) through the interface between the fluorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 120) and the phosphorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 140), energy loss can be reduced because the triplet excitation energy in the fluorescent light-emitting layer (the light-emitting layer 120) caused by the diffusion is converted into light emission through TTA.

As described above, ExTET is utilized in the light-emitting layer 140 and TTA is utilized in the light-emitting layer 120; thus, the light-emitting element 254 can have a reduced energy loss and a high emission efficiency. Furthermore, in the case where the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 are in contact with each other as in the light-emitting element 254, the number of the EL layers 100 as well as the energy loss can be reduced. Therefore, a light-emitting element with low manufacturing costs can be obtained.

Note that the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 are not necessarily in contact with each other. In that case, it is possible to prevent energy transfer by the Dexter mechanism (in particular, triplet energy transfer) from the organic compound 141_1 in an excited state, the organic compound 141_2 in an excited state, or the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound) in an excited state which is generated in the light-emitting layer 140 to the host material 121 or the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 120. Therefore, the thickness of a layer provided between the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 may be several nanometers. Specifically, the thickness is preferably more than or equal to 1 nm and less than or equal to 5 nm, in which case an increase in driving voltage can be inhibited.

The layer provided between the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 may contain a single material or both a hole-transport material and an electron-transport material. In the case of a single material, a bipolar material may be used. The bipolar material here refers to a material in which the ratio between the electron mobility and the hole mobility is 100 or less. Alternatively, the hole-transport material, the electron-transport material, or the like may be used. At least one of materials contained in the layer may be the same as the host material (the organic compound 141_1 or 141_2) of the light-emitting layer 140. This facilitates the manufacture of the light-emitting element and reduces the driving voltage. Furthermore, the hole-transport material and the electron-transport material may form an exciplex, which effectively prevents exciton diffusion. Specifically, it is possible to prevent energy transfer from the host material (the organic compound 141_1 or 141_2) in an excited state or the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound) in an excited state of the light-emitting layer 140 to the host material 121 or the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 120.

In the light-emitting element 254, the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 have been described as being positioned on the hole-transport layer 112 side and the electron-transport layer 118 side, respectively; however, the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure. The light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 may be positioned on the electron-transport layer 118 side and the hole-transport layer 112 side, respectively.

Note that in the light-emitting element 254, a carrier recombination region is preferably distributed to some extent. Therefore, it is preferable that the light-emitting layer 120 or 140 have an appropriate degree of carrier-trapping property. It is particularly preferable that the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 140 have an electron-trapping property. Alternatively, the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) in the light-emitting layer 120 preferably has a hole-trapping property.

Note that light emitted from the light-emitting layer 120 preferably has an emission peak on the shorter wavelength side than light emitted from the light-emitting layer 140. The luminance of a light-emitting element using a phosphorescent compound emitting light with a short wavelength tends to degrade quickly. By using fluorescence with a short wavelength, a light-emitting element with less degradation of luminance can be provided.

Furthermore, the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 may be made to emit light with different emission wavelengths, so that the light-emitting element can be a multicolor light-emitting element. In that case, the emission spectrum of the light-emitting element is formed by combining light having different emission peaks, and thus has at least two local maximum values.

The above structure is also suitable for obtaining white light emission. When the light-emitting layer 120 and the light-emitting layer 140 emit light of complementary colors, white light emission can be obtained.

In addition, white light emission with a high color rendering property that is formed of three primary colors or four or more colors can be obtained by using a plurality of light-emitting materials emitting light of different emission wavelengths for one of the light-emitting layers 120 and 140 or both. In that case, the light-emitting layer may be divided into layers and each of the divided layers may contain a light-emitting material different from the others.

<Example of Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layers>

Next, materials that can be used in the light-emitting layers 120, 140, and 170 are described.

<<Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layer 120>>

In the light-emitting layer 120, the host material 121 is present in the largest proportion by weight, and the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) is dispersed in the host material 121. The S1 level of the host material 121 is preferably higher than the S1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound) while the T1 level of the host material 121 is preferably lower than the T1 level of the guest material 122 (fluorescent compound).

In the light-emitting layer 120, the guest material 122 is preferably, but not particularly limited to, an anthracene derivative, a tetracene derivative, a chrysene derivative, a phenanthrene derivative, a pyrene derivative, a perylene derivative, a stilbene derivative, an acridone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a phenoxazine derivative, a phenothiazine derivative, or the like. Specifically, the fluorescent compound described in Embodiment 1 as an example of the guest material 132 can be used, for example.

Although there is no particular limitation on a material that can be used as the host material 121 in the light-emitting layer 120, any of the following materials can be used, for example: metal complexes such as tris(8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Alq), tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: Almq₃), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium(II) (abbreviation: BeBq₂), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum(III) (abbreviation: BAlq), bis(8-quinolinolato)zinc(II) (abbreviation: Znq), bis[2-(2-benzoxazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnPBO), and bis[2-(2-benzothiazolyl)phenolato]zinc(II) (abbreviation: ZnBTZ); heterocyclic compounds such as 2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation: PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(p-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene (abbreviation: OXD-7), 3-(4-biphenylyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: TAZ), 2,2′,2″-(1,3,5-benzenetriyl)tris(1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole) (abbreviation: TPBI), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen), bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP), and 9-[4-(5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: CO11); and aromatic amine compounds such as 4,4′-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB or α-NPD), N,N′-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N′-diphenyl-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4,4′-diamine (abbreviation: TPD), and 4,4′-bis[N-(spiro-9,9′-bifluoren-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: BSPB). In addition, condensed polycyclic aromatic compounds such as anthracene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, chrysene derivatives, and dibenzo[g,p]chrysene derivatives can be given, and specific examples are 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPAnth), N,N-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: CzA1PA), 4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: DPhPA), 4-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4′-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: YGAPA), N,9-diphenyl-N-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: PCAPA), N,9-diphenyl-N-{4-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]phenyl}-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: PCAPBA), N,9-diphenyl-N-(9,10-diphenyl-2-anthryl)-9H-carbazol-3-amine (abbreviation: 2PCAPA), 6,12-dimethoxy-5,11-diphenylchrysene, N,N,N′,N′,N″,N″,N′″,N′″-octaphenyldibenzo[g,p]chrysene-2,7,10,15-tetramine (abbreviation: DBC1), 9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: CzPA), 3,6-diphenyl-9-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: DPCzPA), 9,10-bis(3,5-diphenylphenyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DPPA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: DNA), 2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA), 9,9′-bianthryl (abbreviation: BANT), 9,9′-(stilbene-3,3′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS), 9,9′-(stilbene-4,4′-diyl)diphenanthrene (abbreviation: DPNS2), 1,1′,1″-(benzene-1,3,5-triyl)tripyrene (abbreviation: TPB3), and the like. One or more substances having a wider energy gap than the guest material 122 is preferably selected from these substances and known substances.

Note that the light-emitting layer 120 can have a structure in which two or more layers are stacked. For example, in the case where the light-emitting layer 120 is formed by stacking a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer in this order from the hole-transport layer side, the first light-emitting layer is formed using a substance having a hole-transport property as the host material and the second light-emitting layer is formed using a substance having an electron-transport property as the host material.

In the light-emitting layer 120, the host material 121 may be composed of a single compound or a plurality of compounds. The light-emitting layer 120 may include a material other than the host material 121 and the guest material 122.

The light-emitting layer 120 may have the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1. In that case, the host material 131 and the guest material 132 (fluorescent compound) described in Embodiment 1 are preferably used.

<<Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layer 140>>

In the light-emitting layer 140, the host material 141 is present in the largest proportion by weight, and the guest material 142 (fluorescent compound) is dispersed in the host material 141. The T1 level of the host material 141 (organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2) is preferably higher than the T1 level of the guest material 142 in the light-emitting layer 140.

Examples of the organic compound 141_1 include a zinc- or aluminum-based metal complex, an oxadiazole derivative, a triazole derivative, a benzimidazole derivative, a quinoxaline derivative, a dibenzoquinoxaline derivative, a dibenzothiophene derivative, a dibenzofuran derivative, a pyrimidine derivative, a triazine derivative, a pyridine derivative, a bipyridine derivative, and a phenanthroline derivative. Other examples are an aromatic amine and a carbazole derivative. Specifically, the electron-transport material and the hole-transport material described in Embodiment 1 can be used.

As the organic compound 141_2, a substance which can form an exciplex together with the organic compound 141_1 is preferably used. Specifically, the electron-transport material and the hole-transport material described in Embodiment 1 can be used, for example. In that case, it is preferable that the organic compound 141_1, the organic compound 141_2, and the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound) be selected such that the emission peak of the exciplex formed by the organic compounds 141_1 and 141_2 overlaps with an absorption band, specifically an absorption band on the longest wavelength side, of a triplet metal to ligand charge transfer (MLCT) transition of the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound). This makes it possible to provide a light-emitting element with a drastically improved emission efficiency. Note that in the case where a thermally activated delayed fluorescence compound is used instead of the phosphorescent compound, it is preferable that the absorption band on the longest wavelength side be a singlet absorption band.

As the guest material 142 (phosphorescent compound), an iridium-, rhodium-, or platinum-based organometallic complex or metal complex can be used; in particular, an organoiridium complex such as an iridium-based ortho-metalated complex is preferable. As an ortho-metalated ligand, a 4H-triazole ligand, a 1H-triazole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a pyridine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyrazine ligand, an isoquinoline ligand, and the like can be given. As the metal complex, a platinum complex having a porphyrin ligand and the like can be given. Specifically, the phosphorescent compound described in Embodiment 1 as an example of the guest material 132 can be used, for example.

Any material can be used as the light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 140 as long as the material can convert the triplet excitation energy into light emission. As an example of the material that can convert triplet excitation energy into light emission, a thermally activated delayed fluorescence compound can be given in addition to the phosphorescent compound. Therefore, the term “phosphorescent compound” in the description can be rephrased as the term “thermally activated delayed fluorescence compound”.

The material that exhibits thermally activated delayed fluorescence may be a material that can form a singlet excited state from a triplet excited state by reverse intersystem crossing or may be a combination of a plurality of materials which form an exciplex.

In the case where the thermally activated delayed fluorescence compound is formed of one kind of material, any of the thermally activated delayed fluorescence compounds described in Embodiment 1 can be specifically used.

In the case where the thermally activated delayed fluorescence compound is used as the host material, it is preferable to use a combination of two kinds of compounds which form an exciplex. In this case, it is particularly preferable to use the above-described combination of a compound which easily accepts electrons and a compound which easily accepts holes, which forms an exciplex.

The light-emitting layer 140 may have the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1. In that case, the host material 131 and the guest material 132 (phosphorescent compound) described in Embodiment 1 are preferably used.

<<Material that can be Used in Light-Emitting Layer 170>>

As a material that can be used for the light-emitting layer 170, a material that can be used for the light-emitting layer in Embodiment 1 can be used, so that a light-emitting element with high emission efficiency can be formed.

There is no limitation on the emission colors of the light-emitting materials contained in the light-emitting layers 120, 140, and 170, and they may be the same or different. Light emitted from the light-emitting materials is mixed and extracted out of the element; therefore, for example, in the case where their emission colors are complementary colors, the light-emitting element can emit white light. In consideration of the reliability of the light-emitting element, the emission peak wavelength of the light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 120 is preferably shorter than that of the light-emitting material included in the light-emitting layer 170.

Note that the light-emitting units 106, 108, and 110 and the charge-generation layer 115 can be formed by an evaporation method (including a vacuum evaporation method), an ink-jet method, a coating method, gravure printing, or the like.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 3

In this embodiment, examples of light-emitting elements having structures different from those described in Embodiments 1 and 2 are described below with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B, FIGS. 10A and 10B, FIGS. 11A to 11C, and FIGS. 12A to 12C.

<Structure Example 1 of Light-Emitting Element>

FIGS. 9A and 9B are cross-sectional views each illustrating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, a portion having a function similar to that in FIG. 1A is represented by the same hatch pattern as in FIG. 1A and not especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases. In addition, common reference numerals are used for portions having similar functions, and a detailed description of the portions is omitted in some cases.

Light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b in FIGS. 9A and 9B may have a bottom-emission structure in which light is extracted through the substrate 200 or may have a top-emission structure in which light is extracted in the direction opposite to the substrate 200. However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this structure, and a light-emitting element having a dual-emission structure in which light emitted from the light-emitting element is extracted in both top and bottom directions of the substrate 200 may be used.

In the case where the light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b each have a bottom emission structure, the electrode 101 preferably has a function of transmitting light and the electrode 102 preferably has a function of reflecting light. Alternatively, in the case where the light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b each have a top emission structure, the electrode 101 preferably has a function of reflecting light and the electrode 102 preferably has a function of transmitting light.

The light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b each include the electrode 101 and the electrode 102 over the substrate 200. Between the electrodes 101 and 102, a light-emitting layer 123B, a light-emitting layer 123G, and a light-emitting layer 123R are provided. The hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 113, and the electron-injection layer 114 are also provided.

The light-emitting element 260 b includes, as part of the electrode 101, a conductive layer 101 a, a conductive layer 101 b over the conductive layer 101 a, and a conductive layer 101 c under the conductive layer 101 a. In other words, the light-emitting element 260 b includes the electrode 101 having a structure in which the conductive layer 101 a is sandwiched between the conductive layer 101 b and the conductive layer 101 c.

In the light-emitting element 260 b, the conductive layer 101 b and the conductive layer 101 c may be formed of different materials or the same material. The conductive layers 101 b and 101 c are preferably formed of the same conductive material, in which case patterning by etching in the process for forming the electrode 101 can be performed easily.

In the light-emitting element 260 b, the electrode 101 may include one of the conductive layer 101 b and the conductive layer 101 c.

For each of the conductive layers 101 a, 101 b, and 101 c, which are included in the electrode 101, the structure and materials of the electrode 101 or 102 described in Embodiment 1 can be used.

In FIGS. 9A and 9B, a partition wall 145 is provided between a region 221B, a region 221G, and a region 221R, which are sandwiched between the electrode 101 and the electrode 102. The partition wall 145 has an insulating property. The partition wall 145 covers end portions of the electrode 101 and has openings overlapping with the electrode. With the partition wall 145, the electrode 101 provided over the substrate 200 in the regions can be divided into island shapes.

Note that the light-emitting layer 123B and the light-emitting layer 123G may overlap with each other in a region where they overlap with the partition wall 145. The light-emitting layer 123G and the light-emitting layer 123R may overlap with each other in a region where they overlap with the partition wall 145. The light-emitting layer 123R and the light-emitting layer 123B may overlap with each other in a region where they overlap with the partition wall 145.

The partition wall 145 has an insulating property and is formed using an inorganic or organic material. Examples of the inorganic material include silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, and aluminum nitride. Examples of the organic material include photosensitive resin materials such as an acrylic resin and a polyimide resin.

Note that a silicon oxynitride film refers to a film in which the proportion of oxygen is higher than that of nitrogen. The silicon oxynitride film preferably contains oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, and hydrogen in the ranges of 55 atomic % to 65 atomic %, 1 atomic % to 20 atomic %, 25 atomic % to 35 atomic %, and 0.1 atomic % to 10 atomic %, respectively. A silicon nitride oxide film refers to a film in which the proportion of nitrogen is higher than that of oxygen. The silicon nitride oxide film preferably contains nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, and hydrogen in the ranges of 55 atomic % to 65 atomic %, 1 atomic % to 20 atomic %, 25 atomic % to 35 atomic %, and 0.1 atomic % to 10 atomic %, respectively.

The light-emitting layers 123R, 123G, and 123B preferably contain light-emitting materials having functions of emitting light of different colors. For example, when the light-emitting layer 123R contains a light-emitting material having a function of emitting red, the region 221R emits red light. When the light-emitting layer 123G contains a light-emitting material having a function of emitting green, the region 221G emits green light. When the light-emitting layer 123B contains a light-emitting material having a function of emitting blue, the region 221B emits blue light. The light-emitting element 260 a or 260 b having such a structure is used in a pixel of a display device, whereby a full-color display device can be fabricated. The thicknesses of the light-emitting layers may be the same or different.

One or more of the light-emitting layer 123B, the light-emitting layer 123G, and the light-emitting layer 123R preferably have the structure of the light-emitting layer 130 described in Embodiment 1. In that case, a light-emitting element with high emission efficiency and a light-emitting element with high reliability can be fabricated.

One or more of the light-emitting layers 123B, 123G, and 123R may include two or more stacked layers.

When at least one light-emitting layer includes the light-emitting layer described in Embodiment 1 and the light-emitting element 260 a or 260 b including the light-emitting layer is used in pixels in a display device, a display device with high emission efficiency and a display device with high reliability can be fabricated. The display device including the light-emitting element 260 a or 260 b can thus have reduced power consumption.

By providing an optical element (e.g., a color filter, a polarizing plate, and an anti-reflection film) on the light extraction side of the electrode through which light is extracted, the color purity of each of the light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b can be improved. Therefore, the color purity of a display device including the light-emitting element 260 a or 260 b can be improved. Alternatively, the reflection of external light by each of the light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b can be reduced. Therefore, the contrast ratio of a display device including the light-emitting element 260 a or 260 b can be improved.

For the other components of the light-emitting elements 260 a and 260 b, the components of the light-emitting element in Embodiments 1 and 2 may be referred to.

<Structure Example 2 of Light-Emitting Element>

Next, structure examples different from the light-emitting elements illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B.

FIGS. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views of light-emitting elements of embodiments of the present invention. In FIGS. 10A and 10B, a portion having a function similar to that in FIGS. 9A and 9B is represented by the same hatch pattern as in FIGS. 9A and 9B and not especially denoted by a reference numeral in some cases. In addition, common reference numerals are used for portions having similar functions, and a detailed description of such portions is not repeated in some cases.

FIGS. 10A and 10B illustrate structure examples of a light-emitting element including the light-emitting layer between a pair of electrodes. A light-emitting element 262 a illustrated in FIG. 10A has a top-emission structure in which light is extracted in a direction opposite to the substrate 200, and a light-emitting element 262 b illustrated in FIG. 10B has a bottom-emission structure in which light is extracted to the substrate 200 side. However, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to these structures and may have a dual-emission structure in which light emitted from the light-emitting element is extracted in both top and bottom directions with respect to the substrate 200 over which the light-emitting element is formed.

The light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b each include the electrode 101, the electrode 102, an electrode 103, and an electrode 104 over the substrate 200. At least a light-emitting layer 170, a light-emitting layer 190, and the charge-generation layer 115 are provided between the electrode 101 and the electrode 102, between the electrode 102 and the electrode 103, and between the electrode 102 and the electrode 104. The hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the electron-transport layer 113, the electron-injection layer 114, the hole-injection layer 116, the hole-transport layer 117, the electron-transport layer 118, and the electron-injection layer 119 are further provided.

The electrode 101 includes a conductive layer 101 a and a conductive layer 101 b over and in contact with the conductive layer 101 a. The electrode 103 includes a conductive layer 103 a and a conductive layer 103 b over and in contact with the conductive layer 103 a. The electrode 104 includes a conductive layer 104 a and a conductive layer 104 b over and in contact with the conductive layer 104 a.

The light-emitting element 262 a illustrated in FIG. 10A and the light-emitting element 262 b illustrated in FIG. 10B each include a partition wall 145 between a region 222B sandwiched between the electrode 101 and the electrode 102, a region 222G sandwiched between the electrode 102 and the electrode 103, and a region 222R sandwiched between the electrode 102 and the electrode 104. The partition wall 145 has an insulating property. The partition wall 145 covers end portions of the electrodes 101, 103, and 104 and has openings overlapping with the electrodes. With the partition wall 145, the electrodes provided over the substrate 200 in the regions can be separated into island shapes.

The charge-generation layer 115 can be formed with a material obtained by adding an electron acceptor (acceptor) to a hole-transport material or a material obtained by adding an electron donor (donor) to an electron-transport material. Note that when the conductivity of the charge-generation layer 115 is as high as that of the pair of electrodes, carriers generated in the charge-generation layer 115 might transfer to an adjacent pixel and light emission might occur in the pixel. In order to prevent such false light emission from an adjacent pixel, the charge-generation layer 115 is preferably formed with a material whose conductivity is lower than that of the pair of electrodes.

The light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b each include a substrate 220 provided with an optical element 224B, an optical element 224G, and an optical element 224R in the direction in which light emitted from the region 222B, light emitted from the region 222G, and light emitted from the region 222R are extracted. The light emitted from each region is emitted outside the light-emitting element through each optical element. In other words, the light from the region 222B, the light from the region 222G, and the light from the region 222R are emitted through the optical element 224B, the optical element 224G, and the optical element 224R, respectively.

The optical elements 224B, 224G, and 224R each have a function of selectively transmitting light of a particular color out of incident light. For example, the light emitted from the region 222B through the optical element 224B is blue light, the light emitted from the region 222G through the optical element 224G is green light, and the light emitted from the region 222R through the optical element 224R is red light.

For example, a coloring layer (also referred to as color filter), a band pass filter, a multilayer filter, or the like can be used for the optical elements 224R, 224G, and 224B. Alternatively, color conversion elements can be used as the optical elements. A color conversion element is an optical element that converts incident light into light having a longer wavelength than the incident light. As the color conversion elements, quantum-dot elements can be favorably used. The usage of the quantum dot can increase color reproducibility of the display device.

One or more optical elements may be stacked over each of the optical elements 224R, 224G, and 224B. As another optical element, a circularly polarizing plate, an anti-reflective film, or the like can be provided, for example. A circularly polarizing plate provided on the side where light emitted from the light-emitting element of the display device is extracted can prevent a phenomenon in which light entering from the outside of the display device is reflected inside the display device and returned to the outside. An anti-reflective film can weaken external light reflected by a surface of the display device. This leads to clear observation of light emitted from the display device.

Note that in FIGS. 10A and 10B, blue light (B), green light (G), and red light (R) emitted from the regions through the optical elements are schematically illustrated by arrows of dashed lines.

A light-blocking layer 223 is provided between the optical elements. The light-blocking layer 223 has a function of blocking light emitted from the adjacent regions. Note that a structure without the light-blocking layer 223 may also be employed.

The light-blocking layer 223 has a function of reducing the reflection of external light. The light-blocking layer 223 has a function of preventing mixture of light emitted from an adjacent light-emitting element. As the light-blocking layer 223, a metal, a resin containing black pigment, carbon black, a metal oxide, a composite oxide containing a solid solution of a plurality of metal oxides, or the like can be used.

Note that the optical element 224B and the optical element 224G may overlap with each other in a region where they overlap with the light-blocking layer 223. In addition, the optical element 224G and the optical element 224R may overlap with each other in a region where they overlap with the light-blocking layer 223. In addition, the optical element 224R and the optical element 224B may overlap with each other in a region where they overlap with the light-blocking layer 223.

As for the structures of the substrate 200 and the substrate 220 provided with the optical elements, Embodiment 1 can be referred to.

Furthermore, the light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b have a microcavity structure.

<<Microcavity Structure>>

Light emitted from the light-emitting layer 170 and the light-emitting layer 190 resonates between a pair of electrodes (e.g., the electrode 101 and the electrode 102). The light-emitting layer 170 and the light-emitting layer 190 are formed at such a position as to intensify the light of a desired wavelength among light to be emitted. For example, by adjusting the optical length from a reflective region of the electrode 101 to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 170 and the optical length from a reflective region of the electrode 102 to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 170, the light of a desired wavelength among light emitted from the light-emitting layer 170 can be intensified. By adjusting the optical length from the reflective region of the electrode 101 to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 190 and the optical length from the reflective region of the electrode 102 to the light-emitting region of the light-emitting layer 190, the light of a desired wavelength among light emitted from the light-emitting layer 190 can be intensified. In the case of a light-emitting element in which a plurality of light-emitting layers (here, the light-emitting layers 170 and 190) are stacked, the optical lengths of the light-emitting layers 170 and 190 are preferably optimized.

In each of the light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b, by adjusting the thicknesses of the conductive layers (the conductive layer 101 b, the conductive layer 103 b, and the conductive layer 104 b) in each region, the light of a desired wavelength among light emitted from the light-emitting layers 170 and 190 can be increased. Note that the thickness of at least one of the hole-injection layer 111 and the hole-transport layer 112 or at least one of the electron-injection layer 119 and the electron-transport layer 118 may differ between the regions to increase the light emitted from the light-emitting layers 170 and 190.

For example, in the case where the refractive index of the conductive material having a function of reflecting light in the electrodes 101 to 104 is lower than the refractive index of the light-emitting layer 170 or 190, the thickness of the conductive layer 101 b of the electrode 101 is adjusted so that the optical length between the electrode 101 and the electrode 102 is m_(B)λ_(B)/2 (m_(B) is a natural number and λ_(B) is the wavelength of light intensified in the region 222B). Similarly, the thickness of the conductive layer 103 b of the electrode 103 is adjusted so that the optical length between the electrode 103 and the electrode 102 is m_(G)λ_(G)/2 (m_(G) is a natural number and λ_(G) is the wavelength of light intensified in the region 222G). Furthermore, the thickness of the conductive layer 104 b of the electrode 104 is adjusted so that the optical length between the electrode 104 and the electrode 102 is m_(R)λ_(R)/2 (m_(R) is a natural number and λ_(R) is the wavelength of light intensified in the region 222R).

In the case where it is difficult to precisely determine the reflective regions of the electrodes 101 to 104, the optical length for increasing the intensity of light emitted from the light-emitting layer 170 or the light-emitting layer 190 may be derived on the assumption that certain regions of the electrodes 101 to 104 are the reflective regions. In the case where it is difficult to precisely determine the light-emitting regions of the light-emitting layer 170 and the light-emitting layer 190, the optical length for increasing the intensity of light emitted from the light-emitting layer 170 and the light-emitting layer 190 may be derived on the assumption that certain regions of the light-emitting layer 170 and the light-emitting layer 190 are the light-emitting regions.

In the above manner, with the microcavity structure, in which the optical length between the pair of electrodes in the respective regions is adjusted, scattering and absorption of light in the vicinity of the electrodes can be suppressed, resulting in high light extraction efficiency.

In the above structure, the conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b preferably have a function of transmitting light. The materials of the conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b may be the same or different. It is preferable to use the same material for the conductive layer 101 b, the conductive layer 103 b, and the conductive layer 104 b because patterning by etching in the formation process of the electrode 101, the electrode 103, and the electrode 104 can be performed easily. Each of the conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b may have a stacked structure of two or more layers.

Since the light-emitting element 262 a illustrated in FIG. 10A has a top-emission structure, it is preferable that the conductive layer 101 a, the conductive layer 103 a, and the conductive layer 104 a have a function of reflecting light. In addition, it is preferable that the electrode 102 have functions of transmitting light and reflecting light.

Since the light-emitting element 262 b illustrated in FIG. 10B has a bottom-emission structure, it is preferable that the conductive layer 101 a, the conductive layer 103 a, and the conductive layer 104 a have functions of transmitting light and reflecting light. In addition, it is preferable that the electrode 102 have a function of reflecting light.

In each of the light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b, the conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a may be formed of different materials or the same material. When the conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a are formed of the same material, manufacturing cost of the light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b can be reduced. Note that each of the conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a may have a stacked structure including two or more layers.

At least one of the structures described in Embodiments 1 and 2 is preferably used for at least one of the light-emitting layers 170 and 190 included in the light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b. In this way, a light-emitting element with high emission efficiency and a light-emitting element with high reliability can be fabricated.

Either or both of the light-emitting layers 170 and 190 may have a stacked structure of two layers like the light-emitting layers 190 a and 190 b, for example. Two kinds of light-emitting materials (a first compound and a second compound) for emitting light of different colors are used in the two light-emitting layers, so that light of a plurality of colors can be obtained at the same time. It is particularly preferable to select the light-emitting materials of the light-emitting layers so that white light can be obtained by combining light emissions from the light-emitting layers 170 and 190.

Either or both of the light-emitting layers 170 and 190 may have a stacked structure of three or more layers, in which a layer not including a light-emitting material may be included.

In the above-described manner, by using the light-emitting element 262 a or 262 b including the light-emitting layer having at least one of the structures described in Embodiments 1 and 2 in pixels in a display device, a display device with high emission efficiency and a display device with high reliability can be fabricated. Accordingly, the display device including the light-emitting element 262 a or 262 b can have low power consumption.

For the other components of the light-emitting elements 262 a and 262 b, the components of the light-emitting element 260 a or 260 b or the light-emitting element in Embodiments 1 and 2 may be referred to.

<Fabrication Method of Light-Emitting Element>

Next, a method for fabricating a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention is described below with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C and FIGS. 12A to 12C. Here, a method for fabricating the light-emitting element 262 a illustrated in FIG. 10A is described.

FIGS. 11A to 11C and FIGS. 12A to 12C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method for fabricating the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention.

The method for fabricating the light-emitting element 262 a described below includes first to seventh steps.

<<First Step>>

In the first step, the electrodes (specifically the conductive layer 101 a of the electrode 101, the conductive layer 103 a of the electrode 103, and the conductive layer 104 a of the electrode 104) of the light-emitting elements are formed over the substrate 200 (see FIG. 11A).

In this embodiment, a conductive layer having a function of reflecting light is formed over the substrate 200 and processed into a desired shape; whereby the conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a are formed. As the conductive layer having a function of reflecting light, an alloy film of silver, palladium, and copper (also referred to as an Ag—Pd—Cu film or APC) is used. The conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a are preferably formed through a step of processing the same conductive layer, because the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Note that a plurality of transistors may be formed over the substrate 200 before the first step. The plurality of transistors may be electrically connected to the conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a.

<<Second Step>>

In the second step, the conductive layer 101 b having a function of transmitting light is formed over the conductive layer 101 a of the electrode 101, the conductive layer 103 b having a function of transmitting light is formed over the conductive layer 103 a of the electrode 103, and the conductive layer 104 b having a function of transmitting light is formed over the conductive layer 104 a of the electrode 104 (see FIG. 11B).

In this embodiment, the conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b each having a function of transmitting light are formed over the conductive layers 101 a, 103 a, and 104 a each having a function of reflecting light, respectively, whereby the electrode 101, the electrode 103, and the electrode 104 are formed. As the conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b, ITSO films are used.

The conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b having a function of transmitting light may be formed in a plurality of steps. When the conductive layers 101 b, 103 b, and 104 b having a function of transmitting light are formed in a plurality of steps, they can be formed to have thicknesses which enable microcavity structures appropriate in the respective regions.

<<Third Step>>

In the third step, the partition wall 145 that covers end portions of the electrodes of the light-emitting element is formed (see FIG. 11C).

The partition wall 145 includes an opening overlapping with the electrode. The conductive film exposed by the opening functions as the anode of the light-emitting element. As the partition wall 145, a polyimide-based resin is used in this embodiment.

In the first to third steps, since there is no possibility of damaging the EL layer (a layer containing an organic compound), a variety of film formation methods and micromachining technologies can be employed. In this embodiment, a reflective conductive layer is formed by a sputtering method, a pattern is formed over the conductive layer by a lithography method, and then the conductive layer is processed into an island shape by a dry etching method or a wet etching method to form the conductive layer 101 a of the electrode 101, the conductive layer 103 a of the electrode 103, and the conductive layer 104 a of the electrode 104. Then, a transparent conductive film is formed by a sputtering method, a pattern is formed over the transparent conductive film by a lithography method, and then the transparent conductive film is processed into island shapes by a wet etching method to form the electrodes 101, 103, and 104.

<<Fourth Step>>

In the fourth step, the hole-injection layer 111, the hole-transport layer 112, the light-emitting layer 190, the electron-transport layer 113, the electron-injection layer 114, and the charge-generation layer 115 are formed (see FIG. 12A).

The hole-injection layer 111 can be formed by co-evaporating a hole-transport material and a material containing an acceptor substance. Note that a co-evaporation method is an evaporation method in which a plurality of different substances are concurrently vaporized from respective different evaporation sources. The hole-transport layer 112 can be formed by evaporating a hole-transport material.

The light-emitting layer 190 can be formed by evaporating a guest material that emits light of at least one color selected from violet, blue, blue green, green, yellow green, yellow, orange, and red. As the guest material, a fluorescent or phosphorescent organic compound can be used. The structure of the light-emitting layer described in Embodiments 1 and 2 is preferably employed. The light-emitting layer 190 may have a two-layer structure. In such a case, the two light-emitting layers each preferably contain a light-emitting organic compound that emits light of a different color.

The electron-transport layer 113 can be formed by evaporating a substance having a high electron-transport property. The electron-injection layer 114 can be formed by evaporating a substance having a high electron-injection property.

The charge-generation layer 115 can be formed by evaporating a material obtained by adding an electron acceptor (acceptor) to a hole-transport material or a material obtained by adding an electron donor (donor) to an electron-transport material.

<<Fifth Step>>

In the fifth step, the hole-injection layer 116, the hole-transport layer 117, the light-emitting layer 170, the electron-transport layer 118, the electron-injection layer 119, and the electrode 102 are formed (see FIG. 12B).

The hole-injection layer 116 can be formed by using a material and a method which are similar to those of the hole-injection layer 111. The hole-transport layer 117 can be formed by using a material and a method which are similar to those of the hole-transport layer 112.

The light-emitting layer 170 can be formed by evaporating a guest material that emits light of at least one color selected from violet, blue, blue green, green, yellow green, yellow, orange, and red. As the guest material, a fluorescent or phosphorescent organic compound can be used. The structure of the light-emitting layer described in Embodiments 1 and 2 is preferably employed. The light-emitting layer 170 and the light-emitting layer 190 preferably include light-emitting organic compounds exhibiting light of different colors.

The electron-transport layer 118 can be formed by using a material and a method which are similar to those of the electron-transport layer 113. The electron-injection layer 119 can be formed by using a material and a method which are similar to those of the electron-injection layer 114.

The electrode 102 can be formed by stacking a reflective conductive film and a light-transmitting conductive film. The electrode 102 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure.

Through the above-described steps, the light-emitting element including the region 222B, the region 222G, and the region 222R over the electrode 101, the electrode 103, and the electrode 104, respectively, are formed over the substrate 200.

<<Sixth Step>>

In the sixth step, the light-blocking layer 223, the optical element 224B, the optical element 224G, and the optical element 224R are formed over the substrate 220 (see FIG. 12C).

As the light-blocking layer 223, a resin film containing black pigment is formed in a desired region. Then, the optical element 224B, the optical element 224G, and the optical element 224R are formed over the substrate 220 and the light-blocking layer 223. As the optical element 224B, a resin film containing blue pigment is formed in a desired region. As the optical element 224G, a resin film containing green pigment is formed in a desired region. As the optical element 224R, a resin film containing red pigment is formed in a desired region.

<<Seventh Step>>

In the seventh step, the light-emitting element formed over the substrate 200 is attached to the light-blocking layer 223, the optical element 224B, the optical element 224G, and the optical element 224R formed over the substrate 220, and sealed with a sealant (not illustrated).

Through the above-described steps, the light-emitting element 262 a illustrated in FIG. 10A can be formed.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 4

In this embodiment, a display device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 13A and 13B, FIGS. 14A and 14B, FIG. 15, FIGS. 16A and 16B, FIGS. 17A and 17B, FIG. 18, FIGS. 19A and 19B, FIG. 20, FIGS. 21A and 21B, FIGS. 22A to 22D, and FIG. 23.

<Structure Example 1 of Display Device>

FIG. 13A is a top view illustrating a display device 600 and FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line A-B and the dashed-dotted line C-D in FIG. 13A. The display device 600 includes driver circuit portions (a signal line driver circuit portion 601 and a scan line driver circuit portion 603) and a pixel portion 602. Note that the signal line driver circuit portion 601, the scan line driver circuit portion 603, and the pixel portion 602 have a function of controlling light emission from a light-emitting element.

The display device 600 also includes an element substrate 610, a sealing substrate 604, a sealant 605, a region 607 surrounded by the sealant 605, a lead wiring 608, and an FPC 609.

Note that the lead wiring 608 is a wiring for transmitting signals to be input to the signal line driver circuit portion 601 and the scan line driver circuit portion 603 and for receiving a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, a reset signal, and the like from the FPC 609 serving as an external input terminal. Although only the FPC 609 is illustrated here, the FPC 609 may be provided with a printed wiring board (PWB).

As the signal line driver circuit portion 601, a CMOS circuit in which an n-channel transistor 623 and a p-channel transistor 624 are combined is formed. As the signal line driver circuit portion 601 or the scan line driver circuit portion 603, various types of circuits such as a CMOS circuit, a PMOS circuit, or an NMOS circuit can be used. Although a driver in which a driver circuit portion is formed and a pixel are formed over the same surface of a substrate in the display device of this embodiment, the driver circuit portion is not necessarily formed over the substrate and can be formed outside the substrate.

The pixel portion 602 includes a switching transistor 611, a current control transistor 612, and a lower electrode 613 electrically connected to a drain of the current control transistor 612. Note that a partition wall 614 is formed to cover end portions of the lower electrode 613. As the partition wall 614, for example, a positive type photosensitive acrylic resin film can be used.

In order to obtain favorable coverage, the partition wall 614 is formed to have a curved surface with curvature at its upper or lower end portion. For example, in the case of using a positive photosensitive acrylic as a material of the partition wall 614, it is preferable that only the upper end portion of the partition wall 614 have a curved surface with curvature (the radius of the curvature being 0.2 μm to 3 μm). As the partition wall 614, either a negative photosensitive resin or a positive photosensitive resin can be used.

Note that there is no particular limitation on a structure of each of the transistors (the transistors 611, 612, 623, and 624). For example, a staggered transistor can be used. In addition, there is no particular limitation on the polarity of these transistors. For these transistors, n-channel and p-channel transistors may be used, or either n-channel transistors or p-channel transistors may be used, for example. Furthermore, there is no particular limitation on the crystallinity of a semiconductor film used for these transistors. For example, an amorphous semiconductor film or a crystalline semiconductor film may be used. Examples of a semiconductor material include Group 14 semiconductors (e.g., a semiconductor including silicon), compound semiconductors (including oxide semiconductors), organic semiconductors, and the like. For example, it is preferable to use an oxide semiconductor that has an energy gap of 2 eV or more, preferably 2.5 eV or more and further preferably 3 eV or more, for the transistors, so that the off-state current of the transistors can be reduced. Examples of the oxide semiconductor include an In—Ga oxide and an In-M-Zn oxide (M is aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), yttrium (Y), zirconium (Zr), lanthanum (La), cerium (Ce), tin (Sn), hafnium (Hf), or neodymium (Nd)).

An EL layer 616 and an upper electrode 617 are formed over the lower electrode 613. Here, the lower electrode 613 functions as an anode and the upper electrode 617 functions as a cathode.

In addition, the EL layer 616 is formed by any of various methods including an evaporation method (including a vacuum evaporation method) with an evaporation mask, a droplet discharge method (also referred to as an ink-jet method), a coating method such as a spin coating method, and a gravure printing method. As another material included in the EL layer 616, a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound (including an oligomer or a dendrimer) may be used.

Note that a light-emitting element 618 is formed with the lower electrode 613, the EL layer 616, and the upper electrode 617. The light-emitting element 618 preferably has any of the structures described in Embodiments 1 to 3. In the case where the pixel portion includes a plurality of light-emitting elements, the pixel portion may include both any of the light-emitting elements described in Embodiments 1 to 3 and a light-emitting element having a different structure.

When the sealing substrate 604 and the element substrate 610 are attached to each other with the sealant 605, the light-emitting element 618 is provided in the region 607 surrounded by the element substrate 610, the sealing substrate 604, and the sealant 605. The region 607 is filled with a filler. In some cases, the region 607 is filled with an inert gas (nitrogen, argon, or the like) or filled with an ultraviolet curable resin or a thermosetting resin which can be used for the sealant 605. For example, a polyvinyl chloride (PVC)-based resin, an acrylic-based resin, a polyimide-based resin, an epoxy-based resin, a silicone-based resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB)-based resin, or an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA)-based resin can be used. It is preferable that the sealing substrate be provided with a recessed portion and a desiccant be provided in the recessed portion, in which case deterioration due to influence of moisture can be inhibited.

An optical element 621 is provided below the sealing substrate 604 to overlap with the light-emitting element 618. A light-blocking layer 622 is provided below the sealing substrate 604. The structures of the optical element 621 and the light-blocking layer 622 can be the same as those of the optical element and the light-blocking layer in Embodiment 3, respectively.

An epoxy-based resin or glass frit is preferably used for the sealant 605. It is preferable that such a material do not transmit moisture or oxygen as much as possible. As the sealing substrate 604, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, or a plastic substrate formed of fiber reinforced plastic (FRP), poly(vinyl fluoride) (PVF), polyester, acrylic, or the like can be used.

Here, a method for forming the EL layer 616 by a droplet discharge method is described with reference to FIGS. 22A to 22D. FIGS. 22A to 22D are cross-sectional views illustrating the method for forming the EL layer 616.

First, the element substrate 610 over which the lower electrode 613 and the partition wall 614 are formed is illustrated in FIG. 22A. However, as in FIG. 13B, the lower electrode 613 and the partition wall 614 may be formed over an insulating film over a substrate.

Next, in a portion where the lower electrode 613 is exposed, which is an opening portion of the partition wall 614, a droplet 684 is discharged from a droplet discharge apparatus 683 to form a layer 685 containing a composition. The droplet 684 is a composition containing a solvent and is attached to the lower electrode 613 (see FIG. 22B).

Note that the method for discharging the droplet 684 may be performed under reduced pressure.

Then, the solvent is removed from the layer 685 containing the composition, and the resulting layer is solidified to form the EL layer 616 (see FIG. 22C).

The solvent may be removed by drying or heating.

Next, the upper electrode 617 is formed over the EL layer 616, and the light-emitting element 618 is formed (see FIG. 22D).

When the EL layer 616 is formed by a droplet discharge method as described above, the composition can be selectively discharged, and accordingly, loss of materials can be reduced. Furthermore, a lithography process or the like for shaping is not needed, and thus, the process can be simplified and cost reduction can be achieved.

The droplet discharge method described above is a general term for a means including a nozzle equipped with a composition discharge opening or a means to discharge droplets such as a head having one or a plurality of nozzles.

Next, a droplet discharge apparatus used for the droplet discharge method is described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a conceptual diagram illustrating a droplet discharge apparatus 1400.

The droplet discharge apparatus 1400 includes a droplet discharge means 1403. In addition, the droplet discharge means 1403 is equipped with a head 1405 and a head 1412.

The heads 1405 and 1412 are connected to a control means 1407, and this control means 1407 is controlled by a computer 1410; thus, a preprogrammed pattern can be drawn.

The drawing may be conducted at a timing, for example, based on a marker 1411 formed over a substrate 1402. Alternatively, the reference point may be determined on the basis of an outer edge of the substrate 1402. Here, the marker 1411 is detected by an imaging means 1404 and converted into a digital signal by an image processing means 1409. Then, the digital signal is recognized by the computer 1410, and then, a control signal is generated and transmitted to the control means 1407.

An image sensor or the like using a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) can be used for the imaging means 1404. Note that information on a pattern to be formed over the substrate 1402 is stored in a storage medium 1408, and the control signal is transmitted to the control means 1407 on the basis of the information, whereby the head 1405 and the head 1412 of the droplet discharge means 1403 can be separately controlled. A material to be discharged is supplied to the head 1405 and the head 1412 from a material source 1413 and a material source 1414, respectively, through pipes.

Inside the head 1405, a space 1406 filled with a liquid material as indicated by a dotted line and a nozzle serving as a discharge opening are provided. Although not illustrated, an internal structure of the head 1412 is similar to that of the head 1405. When the nozzle sizes of the heads 1405 and 1412 are different from each other, patterns of different materials can be drawn with different widths simultaneously. Alternatively, one head can discharge plural kinds of light-emitting materials or the like and draw a pattern. When a pattern is drawn in a large area, the same material can be simultaneously discharged from a plurality of nozzles and the pattern can be drawn to improve throughput. When a large substrate is used, the heads 1405 and 1412 can freely scan the substrate in directions indicated by arrows X, Y, and Z in FIG. 23, and a region in which a pattern is drawn can be freely set. Thus, a plurality of the same patterns can be drawn over one substrate.

In addition, the step of discharging the composition may be performed under reduced pressure. The substrate may be heated when the composition is discharged. After the composition is discharged, either or both steps of drying and baking are performed. Both the drying and baking steps are heat treatment steps but different in purpose, temperature, and time period. The steps of drying and baking are each performed under normal pressure or reduced pressure, by laser light irradiation, rapid thermal annealing, heating using a heating furnace, or the like. Note that there is no particular limitation on the timing and the number of steps of this heat treatment. The temperature for performing each of the steps of drying and baking in a favorable manner depends on the materials of the substrate and the properties of the composition.

As described above, the EL layer 616 can be formed with the use of a droplet discharge apparatus.

In the above-described manner, the display device including any of the light-emitting elements and the optical elements which are described in Embodiments 1 to 3 can be obtained.

<Structure Example 2 of Display Device>

Next, another example of the display device is described with reference to FIGS. 14A and 14B and FIG. 15. Note that FIGS. 14A and 14B and FIG. 15 are each a cross-sectional view of a display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

In FIG. 14A, a substrate 1001, a base insulating film 1002, a gate insulating film 1003, gate electrodes 1006, 1007, and 1008, a first interlayer insulating film 1020, a second interlayer insulating film 1021, a peripheral portion 1042, a pixel portion 1040, a driver circuit portion 1041, lower electrodes 1024R, 1024G, and 1024B of light-emitting elements, a partition wall 1025, an EL layer 1028, an upper electrode 1026 of the light-emitting elements, a sealing layer 1029, a sealing substrate 1031, a sealant 1032, and the like are illustrated.

In FIG. 14A, examples of the optical elements, coloring layers (a red coloring layer 1034R, a green coloring layer 1034G, and a blue coloring layer 1034B) are provided on a transparent base material 1033. Further, a light-blocking layer 1035 may be provided. The transparent base material 1033 provided with the coloring layers and the light-blocking layer is positioned and fixed to the substrate 1001. Note that the coloring layers and the light-blocking layer are covered with an overcoat layer 1036. In the structure in FIG. 14A, red light, green light, and blue light transmit the coloring layers, and thus an image can be displayed with the use of pixels of three colors.

FIG. 14B illustrates an example in which, as examples of the optical elements, the coloring layers (the red coloring layer 1034R, the green coloring layer 1034G, and the blue coloring layer 1034B) are provided between the gate insulating film 1003 and the first interlayer insulating film 1020. As in this structure, the coloring layers may be provided between the substrate 1001 and the sealing substrate 1031.

FIG. 15 illustrates an example in which, as examples of the optical elements, the coloring layers (the red coloring layer 1034R, the green coloring layer 1034G, and the blue coloring layer 1034B) are provided between the first interlayer insulating film 1020 and the second interlayer insulating film 1021. As in this structure, the coloring layers may be provided between the substrate 1001 and the sealing substrate 1031.

The above-described display device has a structure in which light is extracted from the substrate 1001 side where the transistors are formed (a bottom-emission structure), but may have a structure in which light is extracted from the sealing substrate 1031 side (a top-emission structure).

<Structure Example 3 of Display Device>

FIGS. 16A and 16B are each an example of a cross-sectional view of a display device having a top emission structure. Note that FIGS. 16A and 16B are each a cross-sectional view illustrating the display device of one embodiment of the present invention, and the driver circuit portion 1041, the peripheral portion 1042, and the like, which are illustrated in FIGS. 14A and 14B and FIG. 15, are not illustrated therein.

In this case, as the substrate 1001, a substrate that does not transmit light can be used. The process up to the step of forming a connection electrode which connects the transistor and the anode of the light-emitting element is performed in a manner similar to that of the display device having a bottom-emission structure. Then, a third interlayer insulating film 1037 is formed to cover an electrode 1022. This insulating film may have a planarization function. The third interlayer insulating film 1037 can be formed using a material similar to that of the second interlayer insulating film, or can be formed using any other various materials.

The lower electrodes 1024R, 1024G, and 1024B of the light-emitting elements each function as an anode here, but may function as a cathode. Further, in the case of a display device having a top-emission structure as illustrated in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the lower electrodes 1024R, 1024G, and 1024B preferably have a function of reflecting light. The upper electrode 1026 is provided over the EL layer 1028. It is preferable that the upper electrode 1026 have a function of reflecting light and a function of transmitting light and that a microcavity structure be used between the upper electrode 1026 and the lower electrodes 1024R, 1024G, and 1024B, in which case the intensity of light having a specific wavelength is increased.

In the case of a top-emission structure as illustrated in FIG. 16A, sealing can be performed with the sealing substrate 1031 on which the coloring layers (the red coloring layer 1034R, the green coloring layer 1034G, and the blue coloring layer 1034B) are provided. The sealing substrate 1031 may be provided with the light-blocking layer 1035 which is positioned between pixels. Note that a light-transmitting substrate is favorably used as the sealing substrate 1031.

FIG. 16A illustrates the structure provided with the light-emitting elements and the coloring layers for the light-emitting elements as an example; however, the structure is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, a structure including the red coloring layer 1034R and the blue coloring layer 1034B but not including a green coloring layer may be employed to achieve full color display with the three colors of red, green, and blue. The structure as illustrated in FIG. 16A where the light-emitting elements are provided with the coloring layers is effective in suppressing reflection of external light. In contrast, the structure as illustrated in FIG. 16B where the light-emitting elements are provided with the red coloring layer and the blue coloring layer but not with the green coloring layer is effective in reducing power consumption because of small energy loss of light emitted from the green-light-emitting element.

<Structure Example 4 of Display Device>

Although a display device including sub-pixels of three colors (red, green, and blue) is described above, the number of colors of sub-pixels may be four (red, green, blue, and yellow, or red, green, blue, and white). FIGS. 17A and 17B, FIG. 18, and FIGS. 19A and 19B illustrate structures of display devices each including the lower electrodes 1024R, 1024G, 1024B, and 1024Y. FIGS. 17A and 17B and FIG. 18 each illustrate a display device having a structure in which light is extracted from the substrate 1001 side on which transistors are formed (bottom-emission structure), and FIGS. 19A and 19B each illustrate a display device having a structure in which light is extracted from the sealing substrate 1031 side (top-emission structure).

FIG. 17A illustrates an example of a display device in which optical elements (the coloring layer 1034R, the coloring layer 1034G, the coloring layer 1034B, and a coloring layer 1034Y) are provided on the transparent base material 1033. FIG. 17B illustrates an example of a display device in which optical elements (the coloring layer 1034R, the coloring layer 1034G, and the coloring layer 1034B) are provided between the gate insulating film 1003 and the first interlayer insulating film 1020. FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a display device in which optical elements (the coloring layer 1034R, the coloring layer 1034G, the coloring layer 1034B, and the coloring layer 1034Y) are provided between the first interlayer insulating film 1020 and the second interlayer insulating film 1021.

The coloring layer 1034R transmits red light, the coloring layer 1034G transmits green light, and the coloring layer 1034B transmits blue light. The coloring layer 1034Y transmits yellow light or transmits light of a plurality of colors selected from blue, green, yellow, and red. When the coloring layer 1034Y can transmit light of a plurality of colors selected from blue, green, yellow, and red, light that has passed through the coloring layer 1034Y may be white light. Since the light-emitting element which transmits yellow or white light has high emission efficiency, the display device including the coloring layer 1034Y can have lower power consumption.

In the top-emission display devices illustrated in FIGS. 19A and 19B, a light-emitting element including the lower electrode 1024Y preferably has a microcavity structure between the lower electrode 1024Y and the upper electrode 1026 as in the display device illustrated in FIG. 16A. In the display device illustrated in FIG. 19A, sealing can be performed with the sealing substrate 1031 on which the coloring layers (the red coloring layer 1034R, the green coloring layer 1034G, the blue coloring layer 1034B, and the yellow coloring layer 1034Y) are provided.

Light emitted through the microcavity and the yellow coloring layer 1034Y has an emission spectrum in a yellow region. Since yellow is a color with a high luminosity factor, a light-emitting element emitting yellow light has high emission efficiency. Therefore, the display device of FIG. 19A can reduce power consumption.

FIG. 19A illustrates the structure provided with the light-emitting elements and the coloring layers for the light-emitting elements as an example; however, the structure is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, a structure including the red coloring layer 1034R, the green coloring layer 1034G, and the blue coloring layer 1034B but not including a yellow coloring layer may be employed to achieve full color display with the four colors of red, green, blue, and yellow or of red, green, blue, and white. The structure as illustrated in FIG. 19A where the light-emitting elements are provided with the coloring layers is effective in suppressing reflection of external light. In contrast, the structure as illustrated in FIG. 19B where the light-emitting elements are provided with the red coloring layer, the green coloring layer, and the blue coloring layer but not with the yellow coloring layer is effective in reducing power consumption because of small energy loss of light emitted from the yellow- or white-light-emitting element.

25<Structure Example 5 of Display Device>

Next, a display device of another embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along the dashed-dotted line A-B and the dashed-dotted line C-D in FIG. 13A. Note that in FIG. 20, portions having functions similar to those of portions in FIG. 13B are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. 13B, and a detailed description of the portions is omitted.

The display device 600 in FIG. 20 includes a sealing layer 607 a, a sealing layer 607 b, and a sealing layer 607 c in a region 607 surrounded by the element substrate 610, the sealing substrate 604, and the sealant 605. For one or more of the sealing layer 607 a, the sealing layer 607 b, and the sealing layer 607 c, a resin such as a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) based resin, an acrylic-based resin, a polyimide-based resin, an epoxy-based resin, a silicone-based resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) based resin, or an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) based resin can be used. Alternatively, an inorganic material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, or aluminum nitride can be used. The formation of the sealing layers 607 a, 607 b, and 607 c can prevent deterioration of the light-emitting element 618 due to impurities such as water, which is preferable. In the case where the sealing layers 607 a, 607 b, and 607 c are formed, the sealant 605 is not necessarily provided.

Alternatively, any one or two of the sealing layers 607 a, 607 b, and 607 c may be provided or four or more sealing layers may be formed. When the sealing layer has a multilayer structure, the impurities such as water can be effectively prevented from entering the light-emitting element 618 which is inside the display device from the outside of the display device 600. In the case where the sealing layer has a multilayer structure, a resin and an inorganic material are preferably stacked.

<Structure Example 6 of Display Device>

Although the display devices in the structure examples 1 to 4 in this embodiment each have a structure including optical elements, one embodiment of the present invention does not necessarily include an optical element.

FIGS. 21A and 21B each illustrate a display device having a structure in which light is extracted from the sealing substrate 1031 side (a top-emission display device). FIG. 21A illustrates an example of a display device including a light-emitting layer 1028R, a light-emitting layer 1028G, and a light-emitting layer 1028B. FIG. 21B illustrates an example of a display device including a light-emitting layer 1028R, a light-emitting layer 1028G, a light-emitting layer 1028B, and a light-emitting layer 1028Y.

The light-emitting layer 1028R has a function of exhibiting red light, the light-emitting layer 1028G has a function of exhibiting green light, and the light-emitting layer 1028B has a function of exhibiting blue light. The light-emitting layer 1028Y has a function of exhibiting yellow light or a function of exhibiting light of a plurality of colors selected from blue, green, and red. The light-emitting layer 1028Y may exhibit white light. Since the light-emitting element which exhibits yellow or white light has high light emission efficiency, the display device including the light-emitting layer 1028Y can have lower power consumption.

Each of the display devices in FIGS. 21A and 21B does not necessarily include coloring layers serving as optical elements because EL layers exhibiting light of different colors are included in sub-pixels.

For the sealing layer 1029, a resin such as a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) based resin, an acrylic-based resin, a polyimide-based resin, an epoxy-based resin, a silicone-based resin, a polyvinyl butyral (PVB) based resin, or an ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) based resin can be used. Alternatively, an inorganic material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, or aluminum nitride can be used. The formation of the sealing layer 1029 can prevent deterioration of the light-emitting element due to impurities such as water, which is preferable.

Alternatively, the sealing layer 1029 may have a single-layer or two-layer structure, or four or more sealing layers may be formed as the sealing layer 1029. When the sealing layer has a multilayer structure, the impurities such as water can be effectively prevented from entering the inside of the display device from the outside of the display device. In the case where the sealing layer has a multilayer structure, a resin and an inorganic material are preferably stacked.

Note that the sealing substrate 1031 has a function of protecting the light-emitting element. Thus, for the sealing substrate 1031, a flexible substrate or a film can be used.

The structure described in this embodiment can be combined as appropriate with any of the other structures in this embodiment and the other embodiments.

Embodiment 5

In this embodiment, a display device including a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 24A and 24B, FIGS. 25A and 25B, and FIGS. 26A and 26B.

FIG. 24A is a block diagram illustrating the display device of one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 24B is a circuit diagram illustrating a pixel circuit of the display device of one embodiment of the present invention.

<Description of Display Device>

The display device illustrated in FIG. 24A includes a region including pixels of display elements (the region is hereinafter referred to as a pixel portion 802), a circuit portion provided outside the pixel portion 802 and including circuits for driving the pixels (the portion is hereinafter referred to as a driver circuit portion 804), circuits having a function of protecting elements (the circuits are hereinafter referred to as protection circuits 806), and a terminal portion 807. Note that the protection circuits 806 are not necessarily provided.

A part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 804 is preferably formed over a substrate over which the pixel portion 802 is formed, in which case the number of components and the number of terminals can be reduced. When a part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 804 is not formed over the substrate over which the pixel portion 802 is formed, the part or the whole of the driver circuit portion 804 can be mounted by COG or tape automated bonding (TAB).

The pixel portion 802 includes a plurality of circuits for driving display elements arranged in X rows (X is a natural number of 2 or more) and Y columns (Y is a natural number of 2 or more) (such circuits are hereinafter referred to as pixel circuits 801). The driver circuit portion 804 includes driver circuits such as a circuit for supplying a signal (scan signal) to select a pixel (the circuit is hereinafter referred to as a scan line driver circuit 804 a) and a circuit for supplying a signal (data signal) to drive a display element in a pixel (the circuit is hereinafter referred to as a signal line driver circuit 804 b).

The scan line driver circuit 804 a includes a shift register or the like. Through the terminal portion 807, the scan line driver circuit 804 a receives a signal for driving the shift register and outputs a signal. For example, the scan line driver circuit 804 a receives a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like and outputs a pulse signal. The scan line driver circuit 804 a has a function of controlling the potentials of wirings supplied with scan signals (such wirings are hereinafter referred to as scan lines GL_1 to GL_X). Note that a plurality of scan line driver circuits 804 a may be provided to control the scan lines GL_1 to GL_X separately. Alternatively, the scan line driver circuit 804 a has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, the scan line driver circuit 804 a can supply another signal.

The signal line driver circuit 804 b includes a shift register or the like. The signal line driver circuit 804 b receives a signal (image signal) from which a data signal is derived, as well as a signal for driving the shift register, through the terminal portion 807. The signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function of generating a data signal to be written to the pixel circuit 801 which is based on the image signal. In addition, the signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function of controlling output of a data signal in response to a pulse signal produced by input of a start pulse signal, a clock signal, or the like. Furthermore, the signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function of controlling the potentials of wirings supplied with data signals (such wirings are hereinafter referred to as data lines DL_1 to DL_Y). Alternatively, the signal line driver circuit 804 b has a function of supplying an initialization signal. Without being limited thereto, the signal line driver circuit 804 b can supply another signal.

The signal line driver circuit 804 b includes a plurality of analog switches or the like, for example. The signal line driver circuit 804 b can output, as the data signals, signals obtained by time-dividing the image signal by sequentially turning on the plurality of analog switches. The signal line driver circuit 804 b may include a shift register or the like.

A pulse signal and a data signal are input to each of the plurality of pixel circuits 801 through one of the plurality of scan lines GL supplied with scan signals and one of the plurality of data lines DL supplied with data signals, respectively. Writing and holding of the data signal to and in each of the plurality of pixel circuits 801 are controlled by the scan line driver circuit 804 a. For example, to the pixel circuit 801 in the m-th row and the n-th column (m is a natural number of less than or equal to X, and n is a natural number of less than or equal to Y), a pulse signal is input from the scan line driver circuit 804 a through the scan line GL_m, and a data signal is input from the signal line driver circuit 804 b through the data line DL_n in accordance with the potential of the scan line GL_m.

The protection circuit 806 shown in FIG. 24A is connected to, for example, the scan line GL between the scan line driver circuit 804 a and the pixel circuit 801. Alternatively, the protection circuit 806 is connected to the data line DL between the signal line driver circuit 804 b and the pixel circuit 801. Alternatively, the protection circuit 806 can be connected to a wiring between the scan line driver circuit 804 a and the terminal portion 807. Alternatively, the protection circuit 806 can be connected to a wiring between the signal line driver circuit 804 b and the terminal portion 807. Note that the terminal portion 807 means a portion having terminals for inputting power, control signals, and image signals to the display device from external circuits.

The protection circuit 806 is a circuit that electrically connects a wiring connected to the protection circuit to another wiring when a potential out of a certain range is applied to the wiring connected to the protection circuit.

As illustrated in FIG. 24A, the protection circuits 806 are connected to the pixel portion 802 and the driver circuit portion 804, so that the resistance of the display device to overcurrent generated by electrostatic discharge (ESD) or the like can be improved. Note that the configuration of the protection circuits 806 is not limited to that, and for example, a configuration in which the protection circuits 806 are connected to the scan line driver circuit 804 a or a configuration in which the protection circuits 806 are connected to the signal line driver circuit 804 b may be employed. Alternatively, the protection circuits 806 may be configured to be connected to the terminal portion 807.

In FIG. 24A, an example in which the driver circuit portion 804 includes the scan line driver circuit 804 a and the signal line driver circuit 804 b is shown; however, the structure is not limited thereto. For example, only the scan line driver circuit 804 a may be formed and a separately prepared substrate where a signal line driver circuit is formed (e.g., a driver circuit substrate formed with a single crystal semiconductor film or a polycrystalline semiconductor film) may be mounted.

<Structure Example of Pixel Circuit>

Each of the plurality of pixel circuits 801 in FIG. 24A can have a structure illustrated in FIG. 24B, for example.

The pixel circuit 801 illustrated in FIG. 24B includes transistors 852 and 854, a capacitor 862, and a light-emitting element 872.

One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 852 is electrically connected to a wiring to which a data signal is supplied (a data line DL_n). A gate electrode of the transistor 852 is electrically connected to a wiring to which a gate signal is supplied (a scan line GL_m).

The transistor 852 has a function of controlling whether to write a data signal.

One of a pair of electrodes of the capacitor 862 is electrically connected to a wiring to which a potential is supplied (hereinafter referred to as a potential supply line VL_a), and the other is electrically connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 852.

The capacitor 862 functions as a storage capacitor for storing written data.

One of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 854 is electrically connected to the potential supply line VL_a. Furthermore, a gate electrode of the transistor 854 is electrically connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 852.

One of an anode and a cathode of the light-emitting element 872 is electrically connected to a potential supply line VL_b, and the other is electrically connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 854.

As the light-emitting element 872, any of the light-emitting elements described in Embodiments 1 to 3 can be used.

Note that a high power supply potential VDD is supplied to one of the potential supply line VL_a and the potential supply line VL_b, and a low power supply potential VSS is supplied to the other.

In the display device including the pixel circuits 801 in FIG. 24B, the pixel circuits 801 are sequentially selected row by row by the scan line driver circuit 804 a in FIG. 24A, for example, whereby the transistors 852 are turned on and a data signal is written.

When the transistors 852 are turned off, the pixel circuits 801 in which the data has been written are brought into a holding state. Furthermore, the amount of current flowing between the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 854 is controlled in accordance with the potential of the written data signal. The light-emitting element 872 emits light with a luminance corresponding to the amount of flowing current. This operation is sequentially performed row by row; thus, an image is displayed.

Alternatively, the pixel circuit can have a function of compensating variation in threshold voltages or the like of a transistor. FIGS. 25A and 25B and FIGS. 26A and 26B illustrate examples of the pixel circuit.

The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 25A includes six transistors (transistors 303_1 to 303_6), a capacitor 304, and a light-emitting element 305. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 25A is electrically connected to wirings 301_1 to 301_5 and wirings 302_1 and 302_2. Note that as the transistors 303_1 to 303_6, for example, p-channel transistors can be used.

The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 25B has a configuration in which a transistor 303_7 is added to the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 25A. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 25B is electrically connected to wirings 301_6 and 301_7. The wirings 301_5 and 301_6 may be electrically connected to each other. Note that as the transistor 303_7, for example, a p-channel transistor can be used.

The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 26A includes six transistors (transistors 308_1 to 308_6), the capacitor 304, and the light-emitting element 305. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 26A is electrically connected to wirings 306_1 to 306_3 and wirings 307_1 to 307_3. The wirings 306_1 and 306_3 may be electrically connected to each other. Note that as the transistors 308_1 to 308_6, for example, p-channel transistors can be used.

The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 26B includes two transistors (transistors 309_1 and 309_2), two capacitors (capacitors 304_1 and 304_2), and the light-emitting element 305. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 26B is electrically connected to wirings 311_1 to 311_3 and wirings 312_1 and 312_2. With the configuration of the pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 26B, the pixel circuit can be driven by a voltage inputting current driving method (also referred to as CVCC). Note that as the transistors 309_1 and 309_2, for example, p-channel transistors can be used.

A light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for an active matrix method in which an active element is included in a pixel of a display device or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel of a display device.

In the active matrix method, as an active element (a non-linear element), not only a transistor but also a variety of active elements (non-linear elements) can be used. For example, a metal insulator metal (MIM), a thin film diode (TFD), or the like can also be used. Since these elements can be formed with a smaller number of manufacturing steps, manufacturing cost can be reduced or a yield can be improved. Alternatively, since the size of these elements is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced and higher luminance can be achieved.

As a method other than the active matrix method, the passive matrix method in which an active element (a non-linear element) is not used can also be used. Since an active element (a non-linear element) is not used, the number of manufacturing steps is small, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced or a yield can be improved. Alternatively, since an active element (a non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or higher luminance can be achieved, for example.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 6

In this embodiment, a display device including a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention and an electronic device in which the display device is provided with an input device will be described with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B, FIGS. 28A to 28C, FIGS. 29A and 29B, FIGS. 30A and 30B, and FIG. 31.

<Description 1 of Touch Panel>

In this embodiment, a touch panel 2000 including a display device and an input device will be described as an example of an electronic device. In addition, an example in which a touch sensor is included as an input device will be described.

FIGS. 27A and 27B are perspective views of the touch panel 2000. Note that FIGS. 27A and 27B illustrate only main components of the touch panel 2000 for simplicity.

The touch panel 2000 includes a display device 2501 and a touch sensor 2595 (see FIG. 27B). The touch panel 2000 also includes a substrate 2510, a substrate 2570, and a substrate 2590. The substrate 2510, the substrate 2570, and the substrate 2590 each have flexibility. Note that one or all of the substrates 2510, 2570, and 2590 may be inflexible.

The display device 2501 includes a plurality of pixels over the substrate 2510 and a plurality of wirings 2511 through which signals are supplied to the pixels. The plurality of wirings 2511 are led to a peripheral portion of the substrate 2510, and parts of the plurality of wirings 2511 form a terminal 2519. The terminal 2519 is electrically connected to an FPC 2509(1). The plurality of wirings 2511 can supply signals from a signal line driver circuit 2503 s(1) to the plurality of pixels.

The substrate 2590 includes the touch sensor 2595 and a plurality of wirings 2598 electrically connected to the touch sensor 2595. The plurality of wirings 2598 are led to a peripheral portion of the substrate 2590, and parts of the plurality of wirings 2598 form a terminal. The terminal is electrically connected to an FPC 2509(2). Note that in FIG. 27B, electrodes, wirings, and the like of the touch sensor 2595 provided on the back side of the substrate 2590 (the side facing the substrate 2510) are indicated by solid lines for clarity.

As the touch sensor 2595, a capacitive touch sensor can be used. Examples of the capacitive touch sensor are a surface capacitive touch sensor and a projected capacitive touch sensor.

Examples of the projected capacitive touch sensor are a self-capacitive touch sensor and a mutual capacitive touch sensor, which differ mainly in the driving method. The use of a mutual capacitive type is preferable because multiple points can be sensed simultaneously.

Note that the touch sensor 2595 illustrated in FIG. 27B is an example of using a projected capacitive touch sensor.

Note that a variety of sensors that can sense proximity or touch of a sensing target such as a finger can be used as the touch sensor 2595.

The projected capacitive touch sensor 2595 includes electrodes 2591 and electrodes 2592. The electrodes 2591 are electrically connected to any of the plurality of wirings 2598, and the electrodes 2592 are electrically connected to any of the other wirings 2598.

The electrodes 2592 each have a shape of a plurality of quadrangles arranged in one direction with one corner of a quadrangle connected to one corner of another quadrangle as illustrated in FIGS. 27A and 27B.

The electrodes 2591 each have a quadrangular shape and are arranged in a direction intersecting with the direction in which the electrodes 2592 extend.

A wiring 2594 electrically connects two electrodes 2591 between which the electrode 2592 is positioned. The intersecting area of the electrode 2592 and the wiring 2594 is preferably as small as possible. Such a structure allows a reduction in the area of a region where the electrodes are not provided, reducing variation in transmittance. As a result, variation in luminance of light passing through the touch sensor 2595 can be reduced.

Note that the shapes of the electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 are not limited thereto and can be any of a variety of shapes. For example, a structure may be employed in which the plurality of electrodes 2591 are arranged so that gaps between the electrodes 2591 are reduced as much as possible, and the electrodes 2592 are spaced apart from the electrodes 2591 with an insulating layer interposed therebetween to have regions not overlapping with the electrodes 2591. In this case, it is preferable to provide, between two adjacent electrodes 2592, a dummy electrode electrically insulated from these electrodes because the area of regions having different transmittances can be reduced.

<Description of Display Device>

Next, the display device 2501 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 28A. FIG. 28A corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along dashed-dotted line X1-X2 in FIG. 27B.

The display device 2501 includes a plurality of pixels arranged in a matrix. Each of the pixels includes a display element and a pixel circuit for driving the display element.

In the following description, an example of using a light-emitting element that emits white light as a display element will be described; however, the display element is not limited to such an element. For example, light-emitting elements that emit light of different colors may be included so that the light of different colors can be emitted from adjacent pixels.

For the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2570, for example, a flexible material with a vapor permeability of lower than or equal to 1×10⁻⁵ g·m⁻²·day⁻¹, preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁻⁶ g·m⁻²·day⁻¹ can be favorably used. Alternatively, materials whose thermal expansion coefficients are substantially equal to each other are preferably used for the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2570. For example, the coefficients of linear expansion of the materials are preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁻³/K, further preferably lower than or equal to 5×10⁻⁵/K, and still further preferably lower than or equal to 1×10⁻⁵/K.

Note that the substrate 2510 is a stacked body including an insulating layer 2510 a for preventing impurity diffusion into the light-emitting element, a flexible substrate 2510 b, and an adhesive layer 2510 c for attaching the insulating layer 2510 a and the flexible substrate 2510 b to each other. The substrate 2570 is a stacked body including an insulating layer 2570 a for preventing impurity diffusion into the light-emitting element, a flexible substrate 2570 b, and an adhesive layer 2570 c for attaching the insulating layer 2570 a and the flexible substrate 2570 b to each other.

For the adhesive layer 2510 c and the adhesive layer 2570 c, for example, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (e.g., nylon, aramid), polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin, polyurethane, or an epoxy resin can be used. Alternatively, a material that includes a resin having a siloxane bond such as silicone can be used.

A sealing layer 2560 is provided between the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2570. The sealing layer 2560 preferably has a refractive index higher than that of air. In the case where light is extracted to the sealing layer 2560 side as illustrated in FIG. 28A, the sealing layer 2560 can also serve as an optical adhesive layer.

A sealant may be formed in the peripheral portion of the sealing layer 2560. With the use of the sealant, a light-emitting element 2550R can be provided in a region surrounded by the substrate 2510, the substrate 2570, the sealing layer 2560, and the sealant. Note that an inert gas (such as nitrogen and argon) may be used instead of the sealing layer 2560. A drying agent may be provided in the inert gas so as to adsorb moisture or the like. A resin such as an acrylic resin or an epoxy resin may be used. An epoxy-based resin or a glass frit is preferably used as the sealant. As a material used for the sealant, a material which is impermeable to moisture and oxygen is preferably used.

The display device 2501 includes a pixel 2502R. The pixel 2502R includes a light-emitting module 2580R.

The pixel 2502R includes the light-emitting element 2550R and a transistor 2502 t that can supply electric power to the light-emitting element 2550R. Note that the transistor 2502 t functions as part of the pixel circuit. The light-emitting module 2580R includes the light-emitting element 2550R and a coloring layer 2567R.

The light-emitting element 2550R includes a lower electrode, an upper electrode, and an EL layer between the lower electrode and the upper electrode. As the light-emitting element 2550R, any of the light-emitting elements described in Embodiments 1 to 3 can be used.

A microcavity structure may be employed between the lower electrode and the upper electrode so as to increase the intensity of light having a specific wavelength.

In the case where the sealing layer 2560 is provided on the light extraction side, the sealing layer 2560, is in contact with the light-emitting element 2550R and the coloring layer 2567R.

The coloring layer 2567R is positioned in a region overlapping with the light-emitting element 2550R. Accordingly, part of light emitted from the light-emitting element 2550R passes through the coloring layer 2567R and is emitted to the outside of the light-emitting module 2580R as indicated by an arrow in the drawing.

The display device 2501 includes a light-blocking layer 2567BM on the light extraction side. The light-blocking layer 2567BM is provided so as to surround the coloring layer 2567R.

The coloring layer 2567R is a coloring layer having a function of transmitting light in a particular wavelength range. For example, a color filter for transmitting light in a red wavelength range, a color filter for transmitting light in a green wavelength range, a color filter for transmitting light in a blue wavelength range, a color filter for transmitting light in a yellow wavelength range, or the like can be used. Each color filter can be formed with any of various materials by a printing method, an inkjet method, an etching method using a photolithography technique, or the like.

An insulating layer 2521 is provided in the display device 2501. The insulating layer 2521 covers the transistor 2502 t. Note that the insulating layer 2521 has a function of covering unevenness caused by the pixel circuit. The insulating layer 2521 may have a function of suppressing impurity diffusion. This can prevent the reliability of the transistor 2502 t or the like from being lowered by impurity diffusion.

The light-emitting element 2550R is formed over the insulating layer 2521. A partition 2528 is provided so as to overlap with an end portion of the lower electrode of the light-emitting element 2550R. Note that a spacer for controlling the distance between the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2570 may be formed over the partition 2528.

A scan line driver circuit 2503 g(1) includes a transistor 2503 t and a capacitor 2503 c. Note that the driver circuit can be formed in the same process and over the same substrate as those of the pixel circuits.

The wirings 2511 through which signals can be supplied are provided over the substrate 2510. The terminal 2519 is provided over the wirings 2511. The FPC 2509(1) is electrically connected to the terminal 2519. The FPC 2509(1) has a function of supplying a video signal, a clock signal, a start signal, a reset signal, or the like. Note that the FPC 2509(1) may be provided with a PWB.

In the display device 2501, transistors with any of a variety of structures can be used. FIG. 28A illustrates an example of using bottom-gate transistors; however, the present invention is not limited to this example, and top-gate transistors may be used in the display device 2501 as illustrated in FIG. 28B.

In addition, there is no particular limitation on the polarity of the transistor 2502 t and the transistor 2503 t. For these transistors, n-channel and p-channel transistors may be used, or either n-channel transistors or p-channel transistors may be used, for example. Furthermore, there is no particular limitation on the crystallinity of a semiconductor film used for the transistors 2502 t and 2503 t. For example, an amorphous semiconductor film or a crystalline semiconductor film may be used. Examples of semiconductor materials include Group 14 semiconductors (e.g., a semiconductor including silicon), compound semiconductors (including oxide semiconductors), organic semiconductors, and the like. An oxide semiconductor that has an energy gap of 2 eV or more, preferably 2.5 eV or more, further preferably 3 eV or more is preferably used for one of the transistors 2502 t and 2503 t or both, so that the off-state current of the transistors can be reduced. Examples of the oxide semiconductors include an In—Ga oxide, an In-M-Zn oxide (M represents Al, Ga, Y, Zr, La, Ce, Sn, Hf, or Nd), and the like.

<Description of Touch Sensor>

Next, the touch sensor 2595 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 28C. FIG. 28C corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along dashed-dotted line X3-X4 in FIG. 27B.

The touch sensor 2595 includes the electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 provided in a staggered arrangement on the substrate 2590, an insulating layer 2593 covering the electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592, and the wiring 2594 that electrically connects the adjacent electrodes 2591 to each other.

The electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 are formed using a light-transmitting conductive material. As a light-transmitting conductive material, a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, or zinc oxide to which gallium is added can be used. Note that a film including graphene may be used as well. The film including graphene can be formed, for example, by reducing a film containing graphene oxide. As a reducing method, a method with application of heat or the like can be employed.

The electrodes 2591 and the electrodes 2592 may be formed by, for example, depositing a light-transmitting conductive material on the substrate 2590 by a sputtering method and then removing an unnecessary portion by any of various pattern forming techniques such as photolithography.

Examples of a material for the insulating layer 2593 are a resin such as an acrylic resin or an epoxy resin, a resin having a siloxane bond such as silicone, and an inorganic insulating material such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, or aluminum oxide.

Openings reaching the electrodes 2591 are formed in the insulating layer 2593, and the wiring 2594 electrically connects the adjacent electrodes 2591. A light-transmitting conductive material can be favorably used as the wiring 2594 because the aperture ratio of the touch panel can be increased. Moreover, a material with higher conductivity than the conductivities of the electrodes 2591 and 2592 can be favorably used for the wiring 2594 because electric resistance can be reduced.

One electrode 2592 extends in one direction, and a plurality of electrodes 2592 are provided in the form of stripes. The wiring 2594 intersects with the electrode 2592.

Adjacent electrodes 2591 are provided with one electrode 2592 provided therebetween. The wiring 2594 electrically connects the adjacent electrodes 2591.

Note that the plurality of electrodes 2591 are not necessarily arranged in the direction orthogonal to one electrode 2592 and may be arranged to intersect with one electrode 2592 at an angle of more than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees.

The wiring 2598 is electrically connected to any of the electrodes 2591 and 2592. Part of the wiring 2598 functions as a terminal. For the wiring 2598, a metal material such as aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, nickel, titanium, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, or palladium or an alloy material containing any of these metal materials can be used.

Note that an insulating layer that covers the insulating layer 2593 and the wiring 2594 may be provided to protect the touch sensor 2595.

A connection layer 2599 electrically connects the wiring 2598 to the FPC 2509(2).

As the connection layer 2599, any of various anisotropic conductive films (ACF), anisotropic conductive pastes (ACP), and the like can be used.

<Description 2 of Touch Panel>

Next, the touch panel 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29A. FIG. 29A corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along dashed-dotted line X5-X6 in FIG. 27A.

In the touch panel 2000 illustrated in FIG. 29A, the display device 2501 described with reference to FIG. 28A and the touch sensor 2595 described with reference to FIG. 28C are attached to each other.

The touch panel 2000 illustrated in FIG. 29A includes an adhesive layer 2597 and an anti-reflective layer 2567 p in addition to the components described with reference to FIGS. 28A and 28C.

The adhesive layer 2597 is provided in contact with the wiring 2594. Note that the adhesive layer 2597 attaches the substrate 2590 to the substrate 2570 so that the touch sensor 2595 overlaps with the display device 2501. The adhesive layer 2597 preferably has a light-transmitting property. A heat curable resin or an ultraviolet curable resin can be used for the adhesive layer 2597. For example, an acrylic resin, a urethane-based resin, an epoxy-based resin, or a siloxane-based resin can be used.

The anti-reflective layer 2567 p is positioned in a region overlapping with pixels. As the anti-reflective layer 2567 p, a circularly polarizing plate can be used, for example.

Next, a touch panel having a structure different from that illustrated in FIG. 29A will be described with reference to FIG. 29B.

FIG. 29B is a cross-sectional view of a touch panel 2001. The touch panel 2001 illustrated in FIG. 29B differs from the touch panel 2000 illustrated in FIG. 29A in the position of the touch sensor 2595 relative to the display device 2501. Different parts are described in detail below, and the above description of the touch panel 2000 is referred to for the other similar parts.

The coloring layer 2567R is positioned in a region overlapping with the light-emitting element 2550R. The light-emitting element 2550R illustrated in FIG. 29B emits light to the side where the transistor 2502 t is provided. Accordingly, part of light emitted from the light-emitting element 2550R passes through the coloring layer 2567R and is emitted to the outside of the light-emitting module 2580R as indicated by an arrow in the drawing.

The touch sensor 2595 is provided on the substrate 2510 side of the display device 2501.

The adhesive layer 2597 is provided between the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2590 and attaches the touch sensor 2595 to the display device 2501.

As illustrated in FIG. 29A or 29B, light may be emitted from the light-emitting element through one or both of the substrate 2510 and the substrate 2570.

<Description of Method for Driving Touch Panel>

Next, an example of a method for driving a touch panel will be described with reference to FIGS. 30A and 30B.

FIG. 30A is a block diagram illustrating the structure of a mutual capacitive touch sensor. FIG. 30A illustrates a pulse voltage output circuit 2601 and a current sensing circuit 2602. Note that in FIG. 30A, six wirings X1 to X6 represent the electrodes 2621 to which a pulse voltage is applied, and six wirings Y1 to Y6 represent the electrodes 2622 that detect changes in current. FIG. 30A also illustrates capacitors 2603 that are each formed in a region where the electrodes 2621 and 2622 overlap with each other. Note that functional replacement between the electrodes 2621 and 2622 is possible.

The pulse voltage output circuit 2601 is a circuit for sequentially applying a pulse voltage to the wirings X1 to X6. By application of a pulse voltage to the wirings X1 to X6, an electric field is generated between the electrodes 2621 and 2622 of the capacitor 2603. When the electric field between the electrodes is shielded, for example, a change occurs in the capacitor 2603 (mutual capacitance). The approach or contact of a sensing target can be sensed by utilizing this change.

The current sensing circuit 2602 is a circuit for detecting changes in current flowing through the wirings Y1 to Y6 that are caused by the change in mutual capacitance in the capacitor 2603. No change in current value is detected in the wirings Y1 to Y6 when there is no approach or contact of a sensing target, whereas a decrease in current value is detected when mutual capacitance is decreased owing to the approach or contact of a sensing target. Note that an integrator circuit or the like is used for sensing of current values.

FIG. 30B is a timing chart showing input and output waveforms in the mutual capacitive touch sensor illustrated in FIG. 30A. In FIG. 30B, sensing of a sensing target is performed in all the rows and columns in one frame period. FIG. 30B shows a period when a sensing target is not sensed (not touched) and a period when a sensing target is sensed (touched). In FIG. 30B, sensed current values of the wirings Y1 to Y6 are shown as the waveforms of voltage values.

A pulse voltage is sequentially applied to the wirings X1 to X6, and the waveforms of the wirings Y1 to Y6 change in accordance with the pulse voltage. When there is no approach or contact of a sensing target, the waveforms of the wirings Y1 to Y6 change uniformly in accordance with changes in the voltages of the wirings X1 to X6. The current value is decreased at the point of approach or contact of a sensing target and accordingly the waveform of the voltage value changes.

By detecting a change in mutual capacitance in this manner, the approach or contact of a sensing target can be sensed.

<Description of Sensor Circuit>

Although FIG. 30A illustrates a passive matrix type touch sensor in which only the capacitor 2603 is provided at the intersection of wirings as a touch sensor, an active matrix type touch sensor including a transistor and a capacitor may be used. FIG. 31 illustrates an example of a sensor circuit included in an active matrix type touch sensor.

The sensor circuit in FIG. 31 includes the capacitor 2603 and transistors 2611, 2612, and 2613.

A signal G2 is input to a gate of the transistor 2613. A voltage VRES is applied to one of a source and a drain of the transistor 2613, and one electrode of the capacitor 2603 and a gate of the transistor 2611 are electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor 2613. One of a source and a drain of the transistor 2611 is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the transistor 2612, and a voltage VSS is applied to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor 2611. A signal G1 is input to a gate of the transistor 2612, and a wiring ML is electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor 2612. The voltage VSS is applied to the other electrode of the capacitor 2603.

Next, the operation of the sensor circuit in FIG. 31 will be described. First, a potential for turning on the transistor 2613 is supplied as the signal G2, and a potential with respect to the voltage VRES is thus applied to the node n connected to the gate of the transistor 2611. Then, a potential for turning off the transistor 2613 is applied as the signal G2, whereby the potential of the node n is maintained.

Then, mutual capacitance of the capacitor 2603 changes owing to the approach or contact of a sensing target such as a finger, and accordingly the potential of the node n is changed from VRES.

In reading operation, a potential for turning on the transistor 2612 is supplied as the signal G1. A current flowing through the transistor 2611, that is, a current flowing through the wiring ML is changed in accordance with the potential of the node n. By sensing this current, the approach or contact of a sensing target can be sensed.

In each of the transistors 2611, 2612, and 2613, an oxide semiconductor layer is preferably used as a semiconductor layer in which a channel region is formed. In particular, such a transistor is preferably used as the transistor 2613 so that the potential of the node n can be held for a long time and the frequency of operation of resupplying VRES to the node n (refresh operation) can be reduced.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 7

In this embodiment, a display module and electronic devices including a light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 32, FIGS. 33A to 33G, FIGS. 34A to 34F, FIGS. 35A to 35E, FIGS. 36A to 36D, and FIGS. 37A and 37B.

<Display Module>

In a display module 8000 in FIG. 32, a touch sensor 8004 connected to an FPC 8003, a display device 8006 connected to an FPC 8005, a frame 8009, a printed wiring board 8010, and a battery 8011 are provided between an upper cover 8001 and a lower cover 8002.

The light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the display device 8006, for example.

The shapes and sizes of the upper cover 8001 and the lower cover 8002 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the sizes of the touch sensor 8004 and the display device 8006.

The touch sensor 8004 can be a resistive touch sensor or a capacitive touch sensor and may be formed to overlap with the display device 8006. A counter substrate (sealing substrate) of the display device 8006 can have a touch sensor function. A photosensor may be provided in each pixel of the display device 8006 so that an optical touch sensor is obtained.

The frame 8009 protects the display device 8006 and also serves as an electromagnetic shield for blocking electromagnetic waves generated by the operation of the printed wiring board 8010. The frame 8009 may serve as a radiator plate.

The printed wiring board 8010 has a power supply circuit and a signal processing circuit for outputting a video signal and a clock signal. As a power source for supplying power to the power supply circuit, an external commercial power source or the battery 8011 provided separately may be used. The battery 8011 can be omitted in the case of using a commercial power source.

The display module 8000 can be additionally provided with a member such as a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet.

<Electronic Devices>

FIGS. 33A to 33G illustrate electronic devices. These electronic devices can include a housing 9000, a display portion 9001, a speaker 9003, operation keys 9005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007 (a sensor having a function of measuring or sensing force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, oscillation, odor, or infrared ray), a microphone 9008, and the like. In addition, the sensor 9007 may have a function of measuring biological information like a pulse sensor and a finger print sensor.

The electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 33A to 33G can have a variety of functions, for example, a function of displaying a variety of data (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on the display portion, a touch sensor function, a function of displaying a calendar, date, time, and the like, a function of controlling a process with a variety of software (programs), a wireless communication function, a function of being connected to a variety of computer networks with a wireless communication function, a function of transmitting and receiving a variety of data with a wireless communication function, a function of reading a program or data stored in a memory medium and displaying the program or data on the display portion, and the like. Note that functions that can be provided for the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 33A to 33G are not limited to those described above, and the electronic devices can have a variety of functions. Although not illustrated in FIGS. 33A to 33G, the electronic devices may include a plurality of display portions. The electronic devices may have a camera or the like and a function of taking a still image, a function of taking a moving image, a function of storing the taken image in a memory medium (an external memory medium or a memory medium incorporated in the camera), a function of displaying the taken image on the display portion, or the like.

The electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 33A to 33G will be described in detail below.

FIG. 33A is a perspective view of a portable information terminal 9100. The display portion 9001 of the portable information terminal 9100 is flexible. Therefore, the display portion 9001 can be incorporated along a bent surface of a bent housing 9000. In addition, the display portion 9001 includes a touch sensor, and operation can be performed by touching the screen with a finger, a stylus, or the like. For example, when an icon displayed on the display portion 9001 is touched, an application can be started.

FIG. 33B is a perspective view of a portable information terminal 9101. The portable information terminal 9101 functions as, for example, one or more of a telephone set, a notebook, and an information browsing system. Specifically, the portable information terminal can be used as a smartphone. Note that the speaker 9003, the connection terminal 9006, the sensor 9007, and the like, which are not shown in FIG. 33B, can be positioned in the portable information terminal 9101 as in the portable information terminal 9100 shown in FIG. 33A. The portable information terminal 9101 can display characters and image information on its plurality of surfaces. For example, three operation buttons 9050 (also referred to as operation icons, or simply, icons) can be displayed on one surface of the display portion 9001. Furthermore, information 9051 indicated by dashed rectangles can be displayed on another surface of the display portion 9001. Examples of the information 9051 include display indicating reception of an incoming email, social networking service (SNS) message, call, and the like; the title and sender of an email and SNS message; the date; the time; remaining battery; and display indicating the strength of a received signal such as a radio wave. Instead of the information 9051, the operation buttons 9050 or the like may be displayed on the position where the information 9051 is displayed.

As a material of the housing 9000, for example, an alloy, a plastic, or a ceramic can be used. As a plastic, a reinforced plastic can also be used. Carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), which is one of reinforced plastics, has advantages of being lightweight and corrosion-free. Other examples of reinforced plastics include one including glass fiber and one including aramid fiber. As the alloy, an aluminum alloy and a magnesium alloy can be given. An amorphous alloy (also referred to as metallic glass) containing zirconium, copper, nickel, and titanium especially has high elastic strength. This amorphous alloy has a glass transition region at room temperature, which is also referred to as a bulk-solidifying amorphous alloy and substantially has an amorphous atomic structure. An alloy material is molded in a mold of at least the part of the housing and coagulated by a solidification casting method, whereby part of the housing is formed with the bulk-solidifying amorphous alloy. The amorphous alloy may contain beryllium, silicon, niobium, boron, gallium, molybdenum, tungsten, manganese, iron, cobalt, yttrium, vanadium, phosphorus, carbon, or the like in addition to zirconium, copper, nickel, and titanium. The amorphous alloy may be formed by a vacuum evaporation method, a sputtering method, an electroplating method, an electroless plating method, or the like instead of the solidification casting method. The amorphous alloy may include a microcrystal or a nanocrystal as long as a state without a long-range order (a periodic structure) is maintained as a whole. Note that the term alloy includes both a complete solid solution alloy having a single solid-phase structure and a partial solution having two or more phases. The housing 9000 using the amorphous alloy can have high elastic strength. Even if the portable information terminal 9101 is dropped and the impact causes temporary deformation, the use of the amorphous alloy in the housing 9000 allows a return to the original shape; thus, the impact resistance of the portable information terminal 9101 can be improved.

FIG. 33C is a perspective view of a portable information terminal 9102. The portable information terminal 9102 has a function of displaying information on three or more surfaces of the display portion 9001. Here, information 9052, information 9053, and information 9054 are displayed on different surfaces. For example, a user of the portable information terminal 9102 can see the display (here, the information 9053) with the portable information terminal 9102 put in a breast pocket of his/her clothes. Specifically, a caller's phone number, name, or the like of an incoming call is displayed in a position that can be seen from above the portable information terminal 9102. Thus, the user can see the display without taking out the portable information terminal 9102 from the pocket and decide whether to answer the call.

FIG. 33D is a perspective view of a watch-type portable information terminal 9200. The portable information terminal 9200 is capable of executing a variety of applications such as mobile phone calls, e-mailing, viewing and editing texts, music reproduction, Internet communication, and computer games. The display surface of the display portion 9001 is bent, and images can be displayed on the bent display surface. The portable information terminal 9200 can employ near field communication that is a communication method based on an existing communication standard. In that case, for example, mutual communication between the portable information terminal 9200 and a headset capable of wireless communication can be performed, and thus hands-free calling is possible. The portable information terminal 9200 includes the connection terminal 9006, and data can be directly transmitted to and received from another information terminal via a connector. Power charging through the connection terminal 9006 is possible. Note that the charging operation may be performed by wireless power feeding without using the connection terminal 9006.

FIGS. 33E, 33F, and 33G are perspective views of a foldable portable information terminal 9201. FIG. 33E is a perspective view illustrating the portable information terminal 9201 that is opened. FIG. 33F is a perspective view illustrating the portable information terminal 9201 that is being opened or being folded. FIG. 33G is a perspective view illustrating the portable information terminal 9201 that is folded. The portable information terminal 9201 is highly portable when folded. When the portable information terminal 9201 is opened, a seamless large display region is highly browsable. The display portion 9001 of the portable information terminal 9201 is supported by three housings 9000 joined together by hinges 9055. By folding the portable information terminal 9201 at a connection portion between two housings 9000 with the hinges 9055, the portable information terminal 9201 can be reversibly changed in shape from an opened state to a folded state. For example, the portable information terminal 9201 can be bent with a radius of curvature of greater than or equal to 1 mm and less than or equal to 150 mm.

Examples of electronic devices are a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver), a monitor of a computer or the like, a camera such as a digital camera or a digital video camera, a digital photo frame, a mobile phone handset (also referred to as a mobile phone or a mobile phone device), a goggle-type display (head mounted display), a portable game machine, a portable information terminal, an audio reproducing device, and a large-sized game machine such as a pachinko machine.

Furthermore, the electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention may include a secondary battery. It is preferable that the secondary battery be capable of being charged by non-contact power transmission.

Examples of the secondary battery include a lithium ion secondary battery such as a lithium polymer battery using a gel electrolyte (lithium ion polymer battery), a lithium-ion battery, a nickel-hydride battery, a nickel-cadmium battery, an organic radical battery, a lead storage battery, an air secondary battery, a nickel-zinc battery, and a silver-zinc battery.

The electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention may include an antenna. When a signal is received by the antenna, the electronic device can display an image, data, or the like on a display portion. When the electronic device includes a secondary battery, the antenna may be used for non-contact power transmission.

FIG. 34A illustrates a portable game machine including a housing 7101, a housing 7102, display portions 7103 and 7104, a microphone 7105, speakers 7106, an operation key 7107, a stylus 7108, and the like. When the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention is used as the display portion 7103 or 7104, it is possible to provide a user-friendly portable game machine with quality that hardly deteriorates. Although the portable game machine illustrated in FIG. 34A includes two display portions, the display portions 7103 and 7104, the number of display portions included in the portable game machine is not limited to two.

FIG. 34B illustrates a video camera including a housing 7701, a housing 7702, a display portion 7703, operation keys 7704, a lens 7705, a joint 7706, and the like. The operation keys 7704 and the lens 7705 are provided for the housing 7701, and the display portion 7703 is provided for the housing 7702. The housing 7701 and the housing 7702 are connected to each other with the joint 7706, and the angle between the housing 7701 and the housing 7702 can be changed with the joint 7706. Images displayed on the display portion 7703 may be switched in accordance with the angle at the joint 7706 between the housing 7701 and the housing 7702.

FIG. 34C illustrates a notebook personal computer including a housing 7121, a display portion 7122, a keyboard 7123, a pointing device 7124, and the like. Note that the display portion 7122 is small- or medium-sized but can perform 8 k display because it has greatly high pixel density and high resolution; therefore, a significantly clear image can be obtained.

FIG. 34D is an external view of a head-mounted display 7200.

The head-mounted display 7200 includes a mounting portion 7201, a lens 7202, a main body 7203, a display portion 7204, a cable 7205, and the like. The mounting portion 7201 includes a battery 7206.

Power is supplied from the battery 7206 to the main body 7203 through the cable 7205. The main body 7203 includes a wireless receiver or the like to receive video data, such as image data, and display it on the display portion 7204. The movement of the eyeball and the eyelid of a user is captured by a camera in the main body 7203 and then coordinates of the points the user looks at are calculated using the captured data to utilize the eye point of the user as an input means.

The mounting portion 7201 may include a plurality of electrodes so as to be in contact with the user. The main body 7203 may be configured to sense current flowing through the electrodes with the movement of the user's eyeball to recognize the direction of his or her eyes. The main body 7203 may be configured to sense current flowing through the electrodes to monitor the user's pulse. The mounting portion 7201 may include sensors, such as a temperature sensor, a pressure sensor, or an acceleration sensor, so that the user's biological information can be displayed on the display portion 7204. The main body 7203 may be configured to sense the movement of the user's head or the like to move an image displayed on the display portion 7204 in synchronization with the movement of the user's head or the like.

FIG. 34E is an external view of a camera 7300. The camera 7300 includes a housing 7301, a display portion 7302, an operation button 7303, a shutter button 7304, a connection portion 7305, and the like. A lens 7306 can be put on the camera 7300.

The connection portion 7305 includes an electrode to connect with a finder 7400, which is described below, a stroboscope, or the like.

Although the lens 7306 of the camera 7300 here is detachable from the housing 7301 for replacement, the lens 7306 may be included in the housing 7301.

Images can be taken at the touch of the shutter button 7304. In addition, images can be taken by operation of the display portion 7302 including a touch sensor.

In the display portion 7302, the display device of one embodiment of the present invention or a touch sensor can be used.

FIG. 34F shows the camera 7300 with the finder 7400 connected.

The finder 7400 includes a housing 7401, a display portion 7402, a button 7403, and the like.

The housing 7401 includes a connection portion for engagement with the connection portion 7305 of the camera 7300 so that the finder 7400 can be connected to the camera 7300. The connection portion includes an electrode, and an image or the like received from the camera 7300 through the electrode can be displayed on the display portion 7402.

The button 7403 has a function of a power button, and the display portion 7402 can be turned on and off with the button 7403.

Although the camera 7300 and the finder 7400 are separate and detachable electronic devices in FIGS. 34E and 34F, the housing 7301 of the camera 7300 may include a finder having a display device of one embodiment of the present invention or a touch sensor.

FIGS. 35A to 35E are external views of a head-mounted display 7500 and a head-mounted display 7510.

The head-mounted display 7500 includes a housing 7501, two display portions 7502, an operation button 7503, and a fixing band 7504.

The head-mounted display 7500 has the functions of the above-described head-mounted display 7200 and further includes two display portions.

With the two display portions 7502, the user can see one display portion with one eye and the other display portion with the other eye. Thus, a high-resolution image can be displayed even when a three-dimensional display using parallax or the like is performed. The display portion 7502 is curved around an arc with the user's eye as an approximate center. Thus, distances between the user's eye and display surfaces of the display portion become equal; thus, the user can see a more natural image. Even when the luminance or chromaticity of light from the display portion is changed depending on the user' viewing angle, since the user's eye is positioned in a normal direction of the display surface of the display portion, the influence of the change can be substantially ignorable and thus a more realistic image can be displayed.

The operation button 7503 serves as a power button or the like. A button other than the operation button 7503 may be included.

The head-mounted display 7510 includes the housing 7501, the display portion 7502, the fixing bands 7504, and the pair of lenses 7505.

The user can view display on the display portion 7502 through the lenses 7505. It is favorable that the display portion 7502 be curved. The curved display portion 7502 gives the user a high realistic sensation.

The display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display portion 7502. The display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have a high resolution; thus, even when an image is magnified using the lenses 7505 as illustrated in FIG. 35E, the user does not perceive pixels, and thus a more realistic image can be displayed.

FIG. 36A illustrates an example of a television set. In the television set 9300, the display portion 9001 is incorporated into the housing 9000. Here, the housing 9000 is supported by a stand 9301.

The television set 9300 illustrated in FIG. 36A can be operated with an operation switch of the housing 9000 or a separate remote controller 9311. The display portion 9001 may include a touch sensor. The television set 9300 can be operated by touching the display portion 9001 with a finger or the like. The remote controller 9311 may be provided with a display portion for displaying data output from the remote controller 9311. With operation keys or a touch panel of the remote controller 9311, channels or volume can be controlled and images displayed on the display portion 9001 can be controlled.

The television set 9300 is provided with a receiver, a modem, or the like. A general television broadcast can be received with the receiver. When the television set is connected to a communication network with or without wires via the modem, one-way (from a transmitter to a receiver) or two-way (between a transmitter and a receiver or between receivers) data communication can be performed.

The electronic device or the lighting device of one embodiment of the present invention has flexibility and therefore can be incorporated along a curved inside/outside wall surface of a house or a building or a curved interior/exterior surface of a car.

FIG. 36B is an external view of an automobile 9700. FIG. 36C illustrates a driver's seat of the automobile 9700. The automobile 9700 includes a car body 9701, wheels 9702, a dashboard 9703, lights 9704, and the like. The display device, the light-emitting device, or the like of one embodiment of the present invention can be used in a display portion or the like of the automobile 9700. For example, the display device, the light-emitting device, or the like of one embodiment of the present invention can be used in display portions 9710 to 9715 illustrated in FIG. 36C.

The display portion 9710 and the display portion 9711 are each a display device provided in an automobile windshield. The display device, the light-emitting device, or the like of one embodiment of the present invention can be a see-through device, through which the opposite side can be seen, using a light-transmitting conductive material for its electrodes and wirings. Such a see-through display portion 9710 or 9711 does not hinder driver's vision during driving the automobile 9700. Thus, the display device, the light-emitting device, or the like of one embodiment of the present invention can be provided in the windshield of the automobile 9700. Note that in the case where a transistor or the like for driving the display device, the light-emitting device, or the like is provided, a transistor having a light-transmitting property, such as an organic transistor using an organic semiconductor material or a transistor using an oxide semiconductor, is preferably used.

The display portion 9712 is a display device provided on a pillar portion. For example, an image taken by an imaging unit provided in the car body is displayed on the display portion 9712, whereby the view hindered by the pillar portion can be compensated. The display portion 9713 is a display device provided on the dashboard. For example, an image taken by an imaging unit provided in the car body is displayed on the display portion 9713, whereby the view hindered by the dashboard can be compensated. That is, by displaying an image taken by an imaging unit provided on the outside of the automobile, blind areas can be eliminated and safety can be increased. Displaying an image to compensate for the area which a driver cannot see makes it possible for the driver to confirm safety easily and comfortably.

FIG. 36D illustrates the inside of a car in which bench seats are used for a driver seat and a front passenger seat. A display portion 9721 is a display device provided in a door portion. For example, an image taken by an imaging unit provided in the car body is displayed on the display portion 9721, whereby the view hindered by the door can be compensated. A display portion 9722 is a display device provided in a steering wheel. A display portion 9723 is a display device provided in the middle of a seating face of the bench seat. Note that the display device can be used as a seat heater by providing the display device on the seating face or backrest and by using heat generation of the display device as a heat source.

The display portion 9714, the display portion 9715, and the display portion 9722 can provide a variety of kinds of information such as navigation data, a speedometer, a tachometer, a mileage, a fuel meter, a gearshift indicator, and air-condition setting. The content, layout, or the like of the display on the display portions can be changed freely by a user as appropriate. The information listed above can also be displayed on the display portions 9710 to 9713, 9721, and 9723. The display portions 9710 to 9715 and 9721 to 9723 can also be used as lighting devices. The display portions 9710 to 9715 and 9721 to 9723 can also be used as heating devices.

A display device 9500 illustrated in FIGS. 37A and 37B includes a plurality of display panels 9501, a hinge 9511, and a bearing 9512. The plurality of display panels 9501 each include a display region 9502 and a light-transmitting region 9503.

Each of the plurality of display panels 9501 is flexible. Two adjacent display panels 9501 are provided so as to partly overlap with each other. For example, the light-transmitting regions 9503 of the two adjacent display panels 9501 can be overlapped each other. A display device having a large screen can be obtained with the plurality of display panels 9501. The display device is highly versatile because the display panels 9501 can be wound depending on its use.

Moreover, although the display regions 9502 of the adjacent display panels 9501 are separated from each other in FIGS. 37A and 37B, without limitation to this structure, the display regions 9502 of the adjacent display panels 9501 may overlap with each other without any space so that a continuous display region 9502 is obtained, for example.

The electronic devices described in this embodiment each include the display portion for displaying some sort of data. Note that the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention can also be used for an electronic device which does not have a display portion. The structure in which the display portion of the electronic device described in this embodiment is flexible and display can be performed on the bent display surface or the structure in which the display portion of the electronic device is foldable is described as an example; however, the structure is not limited thereto and a structure in which the display portion of the electronic device is not flexible and display is performed on a plane portion may be employed.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Embodiment 8

In this embodiment, a light-emitting device including the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 38A to 38C and FIGS. 39A to 39D.

FIG. 38A is a perspective view of a light-emitting device 3000 shown in this embodiment, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view along dashed-dotted line E-F in FIG. 38A. Note that in FIG. 38A, some components are illustrated by broken lines in order to avoid complexity of the drawing.

The light-emitting device 3000 illustrated in FIGS. 38A and 38B includes a substrate 3001, a light-emitting element 3005 over the substrate 3001, a first sealing region 3007 provided around the light-emitting element 3005, and a second sealing region 3009 provided around the first sealing region 3007.

Light is emitted from the light-emitting element 3005 through one or both of the substrate 3001 and a substrate 3003. In FIGS. 38A and 38B, a structure in which light is emitted from the light-emitting element 3005 to the lower side (the substrate 3001 side) is illustrated.

As illustrated in FIGS. 38A and 38B, the light-emitting device 3000 has a double sealing structure in which the light-emitting element 3005 is surrounded by the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009. With the double sealing structure, entry of impurities (e.g., water, oxygen, and the like) from the outside into the light-emitting element 3005 can be favorably suppressed. Note that it is not necessary to provide both the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009. For example, only the first sealing region 3007 may be provided.

Note that in FIG. 38B, the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009 are each provided in contact with the substrate 3001 and the substrate 3003. However, without limitation to such a structure, for example, one or both of the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009 may be provided in contact with an insulating film or a conductive film provided on the substrate 3001. Alternatively, one or both of the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009 may be provided in contact with an insulating film or a conductive film provided on the substrate 3003.

The substrate 3001 and the substrate 3003 can have structures similar to those of the substrate 200 and the substrate 220 described in the above embodiment, respectively. The light-emitting element 3005 can have a structure similar to that of any of the light-emitting elements described in the above embodiments.

For the first sealing region 3007, a material containing glass (e.g., a glass frit, a glass ribbon, and the like) can be used. For the second sealing region 3009, a material containing a resin can be used. With the use of the material containing glass for the first sealing region 3007, productivity and a sealing property can be improved. Moreover, with the use of the material containing a resin for the second sealing region 3009, impact resistance and heat resistance can be improved. However, the materials used for the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009 are not limited to such, and the first sealing region 3007 may be formed using the material containing a resin and the second sealing region 3009 may be formed using the material containing glass.

The glass frit may contain, for example, magnesium oxide, calcium oxide, strontium oxide, barium oxide, cesium oxide, sodium oxide, potassium oxide, boron oxide, vanadium oxide, zinc oxide, tellurium oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon dioxide, lead oxide, tin oxide, phosphorus oxide, ruthenium oxide, rhodium oxide, iron oxide, copper oxide, manganese dioxide, molybdenum oxide, niobium oxide, titanium oxide, tungsten oxide, bismuth oxide, zirconium oxide, lithium oxide, antimony oxide, lead borate glass, tin phosphate glass, vanadate glass, or borosilicate glass. The glass frit preferably contains at least one kind of transition metal to absorb infrared light.

As the above glass frits, for example, a frit paste is applied to a substrate and is subjected to heat treatment, laser light irradiation, or the like. The frit paste contains the glass frit and a resin (also referred to as a binder) diluted by an organic solvent. Note that an absorber which absorbs light having the wavelength of laser light may be added to the glass frit. For example, an Nd:YAG laser or a semiconductor laser is preferably used as the laser. The shape of laser light may be circular or quadrangular.

As the above material containing a resin, for example, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (e.g., nylon, aramid), polyimide, polycarbonate, an acrylic resin, polyurethane, or an epoxy resin can be used. Alternatively, a material that includes a resin having a siloxane bond such as silicone can be used.

Note that in the case where the material containing glass is used for one or both of the first sealing region 3007 and the second sealing region 3009, the material containing glass preferably has a thermal expansion coefficient close to that of the substrate 3001. With the above structure, generation of a crack in the material containing glass or the substrate 3001 due to thermal stress can be suppressed.

For example, the following advantageous effect can be obtained in the case where the material containing glass is used for the first sealing region 3007 and the material containing a resin is used for the second sealing region 3009.

The second sealing region 3009 is provided closer to an outer portion of the light-emitting device 3000 than the first sealing region 3007 is. In the light-emitting device 3000, distortion due to external force or the like increases toward the outer portion. Thus, the light-emitting device 3000 is sealed using the material containing a resin for the outer portion of the light-emitting device 3000 where a larger amount of distortion is generated, that is, the second sealing region 3009, and the light-emitting device 3000 is sealed using the material containing glass for the first sealing region 3007 provided on an inner side of the second sealing region 3009, whereby the light-emitting device 3000 is less likely to be damaged even when distortion due to external force or the like is generated.

Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 38B, a first region 3011 corresponds to the region surrounded by the substrate 3001, the substrate 3003, the first sealing region 3007, and the second sealing region 3009. A second region 3013 corresponds to the region surrounded by the substrate 3001, the substrate 3003, the light-emitting element 3005, and the first sealing region 3007.

The first region 3011 and the second region 3013 are preferably filled with, for example, an inert gas such as a rare gas or a nitrogen gas. Alternatively, the first region 3011 and the second region 3013 are preferably filled with a resin such as an acrylic resin or an epoxy resin. Note that for the first region 3011 and the second region 3013, a reduced pressure state is preferred to an atmospheric pressure state.

FIG. 38C illustrates a modification example of the structure in FIG. 38B. FIG. 38C is a cross-sectional view illustrating the modification example of the light-emitting device 3000.

FIG. 38C illustrates a structure in which a desiccant 3018 is provided in a recessed portion provided in part of the substrate 3003. The other components are the same as those of the structure illustrated in FIG. 38B.

As the desiccant 3018, a substance which adsorbs moisture and the like by chemical adsorption or a substance which adsorbs moisture and the like by physical adsorption can be used. Examples of the substance that can be used as the desiccant 3018 include alkali metal oxides, alkaline earth metal oxide (e.g., calcium oxide, barium oxide, and the like), sulfate, metal halides, perchlorate, zeolite, silica gel, and the like.

Next, modification examples of the light-emitting device 3000 which is illustrated in FIG. 38B are described with reference to FIGS. 39A to 39D. Note that FIGS. 39A to 39D are cross-sectional views illustrating the modification examples of the light-emitting device 3000 illustrated in FIG. 38B.

In each of the light-emitting devices illustrated in FIGS. 39A to 39D, the second sealing region 3009 is not provided but only the first sealing region 3007 is provided. Moreover, in each of the light-emitting devices illustrated in FIGS. 39A to 39D, a region 3014 is provided instead of the second region 3013 illustrated in FIG. 38B.

For the region 3014, for example, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (e.g., nylon, aramid), polyimide, polycarbonate, or an acrylic resin, polyurethane, or an epoxy resin can be used. Alternatively, a material that includes a resin having a siloxane bond such as silicone can be used.

When the above-described material is used for the region 3014, what is called a solid-sealing light-emitting device can be obtained.

In the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39B, a substrate 3015 is provided on the substrate 3001 side of the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39A.

The substrate 3015 has unevenness as illustrated in FIG. 39B. With a structure in which the substrate 3015 having unevenness is provided on the side through which light emitted from the light-emitting element 3005 is extracted, the efficiency of extraction of light from the light-emitting element 3005 can be improved. Note that instead of the structure having unevenness and illustrated in FIG. 39B, a substrate having a function as a diffusion plate may be provided.

In the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39C, light is extracted through the substrate 3003 side, unlike in the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39A, in which light is extracted through the substrate 3001 side.

The light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39C includes the substrate 3015 on the substrate 3003 side. The other components are the same as those of the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39B.

In the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39D, the substrate 3003 and the substrate 3015 included in the light-emitting device illustrated in FIG. 39C are not provided but a substrate 3016 is provided.

The substrate 3016 includes first unevenness positioned closer to the light-emitting element 3005 and second unevenness positioned farther from the light-emitting element 3005. With the structure illustrated in FIG. 39D, the efficiency of extraction of light from the light-emitting element 3005 can be further improved.

Thus, the use of the structure described in this embodiment can provide a light-emitting device in which deterioration of a light-emitting element due to impurities such as moisture and oxygen is suppressed. Alternatively, with the structure described in this embodiment, a light-emitting device having high light extraction efficiency can be obtained.

Note that the structure described in this embodiment can be combined as appropriate with any of the structures described in the other embodiments.

Embodiment 9

In this embodiment, examples in which the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention is used for various lighting devices and electronic devices will be described with reference to FIGS. 40A to 40C and FIG. 41.

An electronic device or a lighting device that has a light-emitting region with a curved surface can be obtained with the use of the light-emitting element of one embodiment of the present invention which is manufactured over a substrate having flexibility.

Furthermore, a light-emitting device to which one embodiment of the present invention is applied can also be used for lighting for motor vehicles, examples of which are lighting for a dashboard, a windshield, a ceiling, and the like.

FIG. 40A is a perspective view illustrating one surface of a multifunction terminal 3500, and FIG. 40B is a perspective view illustrating the other surface of the multifunction terminal 3500. In a housing 3502 of the multifunction terminal 3500, a display portion 3504, a camera 3506, lighting 3508, and the like are incorporated. The light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the lighting 3508.

The lighting 3508 that includes the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention functions as a planar light source. Thus, unlike a point light source typified by an LED, the lighting 3508 can provide light emission with low directivity. When the lighting 3508 and the camera 3506 are used in combination, for example, imaging can be performed by the camera 3506 with the lighting 3508 lighting or flashing. Because the lighting 3508 functions as a planar light source, a photograph as if taken under natural light can be taken.

Note that the multifunction terminal 3500 illustrated in FIGS. 40A and 40B can have a variety of functions as in the electronic devices illustrated in FIGS. 33A to 33G.

The housing 3502 can include a speaker, a sensor (a sensor having a function of measuring force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational frequency, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electric power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, oscillation, odor, or infrared rays), a microphone, and the like. When a detection device including a sensor for detecting inclination, such as a gyroscope or an acceleration sensor, is provided inside the multifunction terminal 3500, display on the screen of the display portion 3504 can be automatically switched by determining the orientation of the multifunction terminal 3500 (whether the multifunction terminal is placed horizontally or vertically for a landscape mode or a portrait mode).

The display portion 3504 may function as an image sensor. For example, an image of a palm print, a fingerprint, or the like is taken when the display portion 3504 is touched with the palm or the finger, whereby personal authentication can be performed. Furthermore, by providing a backlight or a sensing light source which emits near-infrared light in the display portion 3504, an image of a finger vein, a palm vein, or the like can be taken. Note that the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention may be used for the display portion 3504.

FIG. 40C is a perspective view of a security light 3600. The security light 3600 includes lighting 3608 on the outside of the housing 3602, and a speaker 3610 and the like are incorporated in the housing 3602. The light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention can be used for the lighting 3608.

The security light 3600 emits light when the lighting 3608 is gripped or held, for example. An electronic circuit that can control the manner of light emission from the security light 3600 may be provided in the housing 3602. The electronic circuit may be a circuit that enables light emission once or intermittently a plurality of times or may be a circuit that can adjust the amount of emitted light by controlling the current value for light emission. A circuit with which a loud audible alarm is output from the speaker 3610 at the same time as light emission from the lighting 3608 may be incorporated.

The security light 3600 can emit light in various directions; therefore, it is possible to intimidate a thug or the like with light, or light and sound. Moreover, the security light 3600 may include a camera such as a digital still camera to have a photography function.

FIG. 41 illustrates an example in which the light-emitting element is used for an indoor lighting device 8501. Since the light-emitting element can have a larger area, a lighting device having a large area can also be formed. In addition, a lighting device 8502 in which a light-emitting region has a curved surface can also be formed with the use of a housing with a curved surface. A light-emitting element described in this embodiment is in the form of a thin film, which allows the housing to be designed more freely. Therefore, the lighting device can be elaborately designed in a variety of ways. Furthermore, a wall of the room may be provided with a large-sized lighting device 8503. Touch sensors may be provided in the lighting devices 8501, 8502, and 8503 to control the power on/off of the lighting devices.

Moreover, when the light-emitting element is used on the surface side of a table, a lighting device 8504 which has a function as a table can be obtained. When the light-emitting element is used as part of other furniture, a lighting device which has a function as the furniture can be obtained.

As described above, lighting devices and electronic devices can be obtained by application of the light-emitting device of one embodiment of the present invention. Note that the light-emitting device can be used for electronic devices in a variety of fields without being limited to the lighting devices and the electronic devices described in this embodiment.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other embodiments as appropriate.

Example 1

In this example, examples of fabricating light-emitting elements of embodiments of the present invention are described. FIG. 42 is a schematic cross-sectional view of each of the light-emitting elements fabricated in this example, and Table 7 shows details of the element structures. In addition, structures and abbreviations of compounds used here are given below. Note that Embodiment 1 can be referred to for other compounds.

TABLE 7 Reference Thickness Layer numeral (nm) Material(s) Weight ratio Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron-injection 119 1 LiF — element 1 layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 35DCzPPy — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 1:0.06 layer 160(1) 30 PCCP:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 1:0.3:0.06 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP:PCCH 0.99:0.01 layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO — Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron-injection 119 1 LiF — element 2 layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 35DCzPPy — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 1:0.06 layer 160(1) 30 PCCP:PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 0.99:0.01:0.3:0.06 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP:PCCH 0.99:0.01 layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO — Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron-injection 119 1 LiF — element 3 layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 35DCzPPy — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 1:0.06 layer 160(1) 30 PCCP:PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 0.9:0.1:0.3:0.06 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP:PCCH 0.99:0.01 layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO — Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron-injection 119 1 LiF — element 4 layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 35DCzPPy — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 1:0.06 layer 160(1) 30 PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ 1:0.3:0.06 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP:PCCH 0.99:0.01 layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO —

<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Elements> <<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Element 1>>

As the electrode 101, an ITSO film was formed to a thickness of 70 nm over the substrate 200. The electrode area of the electrode 101 was set to 4 mm² (2 mm×2 mm).

As the hole-injection layer 111, 4,4′,4″-(benzene-1,3,5-triyl)tri(dibenzothiophene) (abbreviation: DBT3P-II) and molybdenum oxide were deposited over the electrode 101 by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of DBT3P-II:molybdenum oxide=1:0.5 to a thickness of 20 nm.

As the hole-transport layer 112 over the hole-injection layer 111, 3,3′-bis(9-phenyl-9H-carbazole) (abbreviation: PCCP) and 3-(N-phenyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-9H-carbazole (abbreviation: PCCH) were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:PCCH=0.99:0.01 to a thickness of 20 nm.

As the light-emitting layer 160 over the hole-transport layer 112, PCCP, 3,5-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyridine (abbreviation: 35DCzPPy), and tris{2-[5-(2-methylphenyl)-4-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl-κN2]phenyl-κC}iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃) were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.3:0.06 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, 35DCzPPy and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.06 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, 35DCzPPy corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCP corresponds to the second organic compound, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

As the electron-transport layer 118, 35DCzPPy and bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen) were sequentially deposited by evaporation to thicknesses of 10 nm and 15 nm, respectively, over the light-emitting layer 160. Then, as the electron-injection layer 119, lithium fluoride (LiF) was deposited over the electron-transport layer 118 by evaporation to a thickness of 1 nm.

As the electrode 102, aluminum (Al) was deposited over the electron-injection layer 119 to a thickness of 200 nm.

Next, in a glove box containing a nitrogen atmosphere, the light-emitting element 1 was sealed by fixing the substrate 220 to the substrate 200 over which the organic materials were deposited using a sealant for an organic EL device. Specifically, after the sealant was applied to surround the organic materials over the substrate 200 and the substrate 200 was bonded to the substrate 220, the sealant was irradiated with ultraviolet light having a wavelength of 365 nm at 6 J/cm² and heat treatment was performed at 80° C. for 1 hour. Through the above process, the light-emitting element 1 was obtained.

<<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Elements 2 to 4>>

The light-emitting elements 2 to 4 were fabricated through the same steps as those for the light-emitting element 1 except for the step of forming the light-emitting layer 160.

As the light-emitting layer 160 of the light-emitting element 2, PCCP, PCCH, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=0.99:0.01:0.3:0.06 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, 35DCzPPy and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.06 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, 35DCzPPy corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCP corresponds to the second organic compound, PCCH corresponds to an organic compound serving as an impurity (an organic compound having an NH group), and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

As the light-emitting layer 160 of the light-emitting element 3, PCCP, PCCH, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=0.9:0.1:0.3:0.06 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, 35DCzPPy and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.06 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, 35DCzPPy corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCP corresponds to the second organic compound, PCCH corresponds to an organic compound serving as an impurity (an organic compound having an NH group), and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

As the light-emitting layer 160 of the light-emitting element 4, PCCH, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.3:0.06 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, 35DCzPPy and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of 35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.06 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, 35DCzPPy corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCH corresponds to an organic compound serving as an impurity (an organic compound having an NH group), and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

<Characteristics of Light-Emitting Elements>

FIG. 43 shows current density-luminance characteristics of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4. FIG. 44 shows voltage-luminance characteristics. FIG. 45 shows luminance-current efficiency characteristics. FIG. 46 shows luminance-external quantum efficiency characteristics. FIG. 47 shows luminance-power efficiency characteristics. The measurement of the light-emitting elements was performed at room temperature (in an atmosphere kept at 23° C.).

Table 8 shows the element characteristics of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 at around 1000 cd/m².

TABLE 8 External Current CIE Current Power quantum Voltage density chromaticity Luminance efficiency efficiency efficiency (V) (mA/cm²) (x, y) (cd/m²) (cd/A) (lm/W) (%) Light-emitting 4.2 1.6 (0.17, 0.37) 940 60 45 29 element 1 Light-emitting 4.2 1.5 (0.17, 0.37) 880 58 43 28 element 2 Light-emitting 4.4 2.1 (0.17, 0.37) 960 45 32 22 element 3 Light-emitting 5.2 3.8 (0.17, 0.35) 890 23 14 12 element 4

FIG. 48 shows electroluminescence spectra (EL spectra) of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 when a current with a current density of 2.5 mA/cm² was supplied to the light-emitting elements. Note that in FIG. 48, the vertical axis represents the emission intensity (EL intensity) normalized by the maximum values of the electroluminescence spectra.

As shown in FIG. 48, the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 emit blue light. The electroluminescence spectra of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 have a peak at a wavelength of 473 nm and a full width at half maximum of 63 nm.

From FIG. 43 to FIG. 47 and Table 8, it is found that the light-emitting elements 1 and 2 have higher current efficiency than the light-emitting elements 3 and 4. The maximum external quantum efficiencies of the light-emitting elements 1 and 2 are 30% and 29%, respectively, which are extremely excellent values. The light-emitting elements 1 to 3 were driven at a lower voltage than the light-emitting element 4. Thus, the light-emitting elements 1 and 2 show excellent power efficiency. As described above, the intensity of light emission from the guest material was lower in the light-emitting elements 3 and 4 than in the light-emitting elements 1 and 2.

<Measurement Results of Absorption Spectra and Emission Spectra>

Here, the measurement results of the absorption spectra and emission spectra of the compounds that were used in this example are described. The compounds used for the measurement are PCCH and PCCP.

FIG. 49A shows the absorption spectra and the emission spectra of a toluene solution of PCCH and a toluene solution of PCCP, FIG. 49B shows the absorption spectra and the emission spectra of a thin film of PCCH and a thin film of PCCP.

The absorption spectrum was measured using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (V-550, produced by JASCO Corporation). The absorption spectrum of each of the toluene solutions of the organic compounds (PCCH and PCCP) was obtained by subtraction of the absorption spectra of toluene and a quartz cell from the absorption spectrum of the toluene solution of the organic compound put in the quartz cell, and is shown in the graph. The absorption spectrum of each of the thin films was obtained by subtraction of an absorption spectrum of quartz from an absorption spectrum of a sample formed by depositing the organic compound on a quartz substrate by evaporation, and is shown in the graph. The emission spectra were measured with a PL-EL measurement apparatus (manufactured by Hamamatsu Photonics K.K.). The emission spectrum of each of the toluene solutions of the organic compounds was measured with the toluene solution of the organic compound put in a quartz cell. The emission spectrum of each of the thin films was measured with a sample formed by depositing the organic compound over a quartz substrate by evaporation. The thin film whose absorption and emission spectra were measured was formed over a quartz substrate by a vacuum evaporation method.

The measurement results revealed that the absorption spectra of the toluene solutions of PCCH and PCCP are substantially the same and that the absorption spectra of the thin films of PCCH and PCCP are substantially the same. From the data of the absorption spectra of the thin films in FIG. 49B, the absorption edges of PCCH and PCCP, which were obtained from Tauc plot with an assumption of direct transition, were 3.31 eV and 3.30 eV, respectively. Thus, the optical energy gaps of PCCH and PCCP in the solid state were estimated to be 3.31 eV and 3.30 eV, respectively. This reveals that the energy gap of PCCH in the solid state is substantially as wide as that of PCCP in the solid state.

<Results of CV Measurement>

Next, the electrochemical characteristics (oxidation reaction characteristics and reduction reaction characteristics) of PCCH and PCCP were examined by cyclic voltammetry (CV). Note that for the measurement, an electrochemical analyzer (ALS model 600A or 600C, produced by BAS Inc.) was used, and measurement was performed on a solution obtained by dissolving each compound in N,N-dimethylformamide (abbreviation: DMF). In the measurement, the potential of a working electrode with respect to the reference electrode was changed within an appropriate range, so that the oxidation peak potential and the reduction peak potential were obtained. In addition, the HOMO and LUMO levels of each compound were obtained from the estimated redox potential of the reference electrode of −4.94 eV and the obtained peak potentials.

According to the CV measurement results, the oxidation potential and the reduction potential of PCCH were 0.57 V and −2.94 V, respectively, and the oxidation potential and the reduction potential of PCCP were 0.685 V and −2.98 V, respectively. In addition, according to calculation results obtained by the CV measurement, the HOMO level and LUMO level of PCCH were −5.51 eV and −2.00 eV, respectively, and the HOMO level and LUMO level of PCCP were −5.63 eV and −1.96 eV, respectively.

<Measurement Results of Emission Spectra at Low Temperature>

Next, the results of measuring the emission spectra of PCCH and PCCP at low temperatures (10 K) are shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B.

The emission spectra measurement was performed with a PL microscope, LabRAM HR-PL, produced by HORIBA, Ltd., a He—Cd laser (wavelength: 325 nm) as excitation light, and a CCD detector, at a measurement temperature of 10 K. For the measurement, a thin film was formed over a quartz substrate to a thickness of 50 nm and another quartz substrate was attached to the deposition surface in a nitrogen atmosphere.

Note that in the measurement of the emission spectra, in addition to the measurement of a normal emission spectrum, the measurement of a time-resolved emission spectrum in which light emission with a long lifetime is focused on was also performed. Since in this measurement method of emission spectra, the measurement temperature was set at a low temperature (10 K), in the measurement of the normal emission spectrum, in addition to fluorescence, which is the main emission component, phosphorescence was observed. Furthermore, in the measurement of the time-resolved emission spectrum in which light emission with a long lifetime is focused on, phosphorescence was mainly observed.

The measurement results of the emission spectra show that, in the emission spectrum of PCCH, the peak wavelengths (including shoulders) of the fluorescence component and the phosphorescence component on the shortest wavelength side were 391 nm and 469 nm, respectively. In the emission spectrum of PCCP, the peak wavelengths (including shoulders) of the fluorescence component and the phosphorescence component on the shortest wavelength side were 391 nm and 467 nm, respectively.

Thus, calculation from the above peak wavelengths show that the S1 level and the T1 level of PCCH are 3.17 eV and 2.64 eV, respectively, and the S1 level and the T1 level of PCCP are 3.17 eV and 2.66 eV, respectively; accordingly, PCCH and PCCP have substantially the same the S1 levels and substantially the same T1 levels.

Furthermore, the above measurement results reveal that because the peak wavelengths (469 nm and 467 nm) of the phosphorescence components of PCCH and PCCP on the shortest wavelength side are shorter than the peak wavelength (473 nm) of each of the electroluminescence spectra of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4, the S1 levels and the T1 levels of PCCH and PCCP are excitation energy levels sufficient to excite the guest material (Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃) used in the light-emitting elements 1 to 4. PCCH and PCCP were thus found to be less likely to cause quenching in a light-emitting element when used alone.

<Measurement Results of Emission Spectra of Light-Emitting Elements Obtained by Photoexcitation>

FIG. 51 shows emission spectra (PL spectra) obtained when the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 were irradiated with ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 325 nm.

As can be seen in FIG. 51, in the emission spectra of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 obtained by photoexcitation, light emission having a peak wavelength of 474 nm and derived from the guest material is dominant. Furthermore, the light-emitting elements 3 and 4 have lower emission spectrum intensity (PL intensity) of the guest material than the light-emitting elements 1 and 2. That is, light emission from the guest material, also when obtained by photoexcitation, has a lower intensity in the light-emitting elements 3 and 4.

FIG. 52 shows relationship between the external quantum efficiency (EL external quantum efficiency) obtained by applying a current to the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 and the intensity (PL intensity) of the emission spectrum obtained by photoexcitation. As can be seen in FIG. 52, the intensity (PL intensity) of the emission spectrum obtained by photoexcitation is proportional to the external quantum efficiency (EL external quantum efficiency) obtained by current application.

Thus, a conceivable reason of the current efficiencies of the light-emitting elements 3 and 4 lower than those of the light-emitting elements 1 and 2 is a reduction in the emission quantum yield in the light-emitting layers, not the change in carrier balance which is dependent on the host material and the concentration thereof in the light-emitting layers. In other words, the coexistence of PCCH and 35DCzPPy reduced the emission quantum yields in the light-emitting layers.

As suggested above, when a light-emitting layer of a light-emitting element includes an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, such as 35DCzPPy, the content of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, is preferably low. Specifically, it is preferable that the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, to an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, such as 35DCzPPy, be less than or equal to 0.03, and that the weight ratio of such an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, to a compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton, such as PCCP, be less than or equal to 0.01.

<Results of Reliability Test>

FIG. 53 shows the results of reliability tests of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4. For the reliability test, the current density for the light-emitting elements was set to 2.5 mA/cm², and each of the light-emitting elements was continuously driven with a constant current density.

The time (luminance half-life) taken for the luminance of the light-emitting elements 1 to 4 to decrease to 50% of the initial luminance was as follows: the light-emitting element 1, 480 hours; the light-emitting element 2, 87 hours; the light-emitting element 3, 12 hours; and the light-emitting element 4, 3.3 hours. In particular, the light-emitting element 1 shows high reliability.

Next, FIG. 54A shows the correlation between the weight ratio of PCCH (impurity) to 35DCzPPy (the first organic compound) and the luminance half-life, and FIG. 54B shows the correlation between the weight ratio of PCCH (impurity) to PCCP (the second organic compound) and the luminance half-life.

The correlation between the luminance half-life and the weight ratio of PCCH to 35DCzPPy in each of the light-emitting elements 2 to 4 was plotted and fitted by power approximation, whereby a luminance half-life as long as that of the light-emitting element 1, which does not include PCCH, was found to be obtained when the weight ratio of PCCH to 35DCzPPy is 0.003. Therefore, the weight ratio of PCCH to 35DCzPPy is preferably less than or equal to 0.003.

The correlation between the luminance half-life and the weight ratio of PCCH to PCCP in each of the light-emitting elements 2 and 3 was plotted and fitted by power approximation, whereby a luminance half-life as long as that of the light-emitting element 1, which does not include PCCH, was found to be obtained when the weight ratio of PCCH to PCCP is 0.001. Therefore, the weight ratio of PCCH to PCCP is preferably less than or equal to 0.001.

In other words, when a light-emitting layer of a light-emitting element includes an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, such as 35DCzPPy, the content of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, is preferably low. Specifically, it is preferable that the weight ratio of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, to an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, such as 35DCzPPy, be less than or equal to 0.003 because a highly reliable light-emitting element can be obtained, and that the weight ratio of such an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, to a compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton, such as PCCP, be less than or equal to 0.001 because a highly reliable light-emitting element can be obtained.

As described above, by employing the structure of one embodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting element having high emission efficiency can be fabricated. A light-emitting element with reduced power consumption can be fabricated. A highly reliable light-emitting element can be fabricated. A highly reliable light-emitting element emitting blue light and having high emission efficiency can be fabricated.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other examples and embodiments as appropriate.

Example 2

In this example, examples of fabricating light-emitting elements of embodiments of the present invention are described. The schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 42 can be referred to for cross sections of the light-emitting elements fabricated in this example. The detailed element structures are shown in Table 9. In addition, structures and abbreviations of compounds used here are given below. Note that Example 1 and Embodiment 1 can be referred to for other compounds.

TABLE 9 Reference Thickness Layer numeral (nm) Material(s) Weight ratio Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron- 119 1 LiF — element 5 injection layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 4,6mCzP2Pm — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 PCCP:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ 0.2:0.8:0.125 layer 160(1) 30 PCCP:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ 0.6:0.4:0.125 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP — layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO — Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron- 119 1 LiF — element 6 injection layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 4,6mCzP2Pm — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 PCCH:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ 0.2:0.8:0.125 layer 160(1) 30 PCCH:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ 0.6:0.4:0.125 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP — layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO — Light- Electrode 102 200 Al — emitting Electron- 119 1 LiF — element 7 injection layer Electron- 118(2) 15 BPhen — transport layer 118(1) 10 mCzP3Pm — Light-emitting 160(2) 10 PCCH:mCzP3Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ 0.2:0.8:0.125 layer 160(1) 30 PCCH:mCzP3Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ 0.6:0.4:0.125 Hole-transport 112 20 PCCP — layer Hole-injection 111 20 DBT3P-II:MoO₃ 1:0.5 layer Electrode 101 70 ITSO —

<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Elements> <<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Element 5>>

As the electrode 101, an ITSO film was formed to a thickness of 70 nm over the substrate 200. The electrode area of the electrode 101 was set to 4 mm² (2 mm×2 mm).

As the hole-injection layer 111, DBT3P-II and molybdenum oxide were deposited over the electrode 101 by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of DBT3P-II:molybdenum oxide=1:0.5 to a thickness of 20 nm.

As the hole-transport layer 112 over the hole-injection layer 111, PCCP was deposited by evaporation to a thickness of 20 nm.

As the light-emitting layer 160 over the hole-transport layer 112, PCCP, 4,6-bis[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: 4,6mCzP2Pm), and tris{2-[4-(4-cyano-2,6-diisobutylphenyl)-5-(2-methylphenyl)-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl-κN²]phenyl-κC}iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃) were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:4,61nCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.6:0.4:0.125 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, PCCP, 4,6mCzP2Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.2:0.8:0.125 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, 4,6mCzP2Pm corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCP corresponds to the second organic compound, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

As the electron-transport layer 118, 4,6mCzP2Pm and BPhen were sequentially deposited by evaporation to thicknesses of 10 nm and 15 nm, respectively, over the light-emitting layer 160. Then, as the electron-injection layer 119, lithium fluoride (LiF) was deposited over the electron-transport layer 118 by evaporation to a thickness of 1 nm.

As the electrode 102, aluminum (Al) was deposited over the electron-injection layer 119 to a thickness of 200 nm.

Next, in a glove box containing a nitrogen atmosphere, the light-emitting element 5 was sealed by fixing the substrate 220 to the substrate 200 over which the organic materials were deposited using a sealant for an organic EL device. For the detailed method, description of the light-emitting element 1 can be referred to. Through the above steps, the light-emitting element 5 was obtained.

<<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Element 6>>

The light-emitting element 6 was fabricated through the same steps as those for the light-emitting element 5 except for the step of forming the light-emitting layer 160.

As the light-emitting layer 160 of the light-emitting element 6, PCCH, 4,6mCzP2Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.6:0.4:0.125 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, PCCH, 4,6mCzP2Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃)=0.2:0.8:0.125 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, 4,6mCzP2Pm corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCH corresponds to an organic compound serving as an impurity (an organic compound having an NH group), and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

<<Fabrication of Light-Emitting Element 7>>

The light-emitting element 7 was fabricated through the same steps as those for the light-emitting element 5 except for the steps of forming the light-emitting layer 160 and the electron-transport layer 118.

As the light-emitting layer 160 of the light-emitting element 7, PCCH, 2,4,6-tris[3-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)phenyl]pyrimidine (abbreviation: mCzP3Pm), and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:mCzP3Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.6:0.4:0.125 to a thickness of 30 nm, and successively, PCCH, mCzP3Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:mCzP3Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.2:0.8:0.125 to a thickness of 10 nm. Note that in the light-emitting layer 160, mCzP3Pm corresponds to the first organic compound, PCCH corresponds to an organic compound serving as an impurity (an organic compound having an NH group), and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ corresponds to the guest material (the phosphorescent compound).

As the electron-transport layer 118, mCzP3Pm and BPhen were sequentially deposited by evaporation to thicknesses of 10 nm and 15 nm, respectively, over the light-emitting layer 160.

<Characteristics of Light-Emitting Elements>

FIG. 55 shows current density-luminance characteristics of the light-emitting elements 5 to 7. FIG. 56 shows voltage-luminance characteristics. FIG. 57 shows luminance-current efficiency characteristics. FIG. 58 shows luminance-external quantum efficiency characteristics. FIG. 59 shows luminance-power efficiency characteristics. The measurement of the light-emitting elements was performed at room temperature (in an atmosphere kept at 23° C.).

Table 10 shows the element characteristics of the light-emitting elements 5 to 7 at around 1000 cd/m².

TABLE 10 External Current CIE Current Power quantum Voltage density chromaticity Luminance efficiency efficiency efficiency (V) (mA/cm²) (x, y) (cd/m²) (cd/A) (lm/W) (%) Light-emitting 3.3 1.2 (0.19, 0.50) 980 85 81 34 element 5 Light-emitting 5.0 12 (0.20, 0.50) 990 8.2 5.2 3.2 element 6 Light-emitting 4.2 2.5 (0.20, 0.51) 910 37 28 14 element 7

FIG. 60 shows electroluminescence spectra of the light-emitting elements 5 to 7 when a current with a current density of 2.5 mA/cm² was supplied to the light-emitting elements. Note that in FIG. 60, the vertical axis represents the emission intensity (EL intensity) normalized by the maximum values of the electroluminescence spectra.

As shown in FIG. 60, the light-emitting elements 5 to 7 emit blue light. The electroluminescence spectra of the light-emitting elements 5 to 7 have a peak at a wavelength of 490 nm and a full width at half maximum of 66 nm.

From FIG. 55 to FIG. 59 and Table 10, it is found that the light-emitting element 5 has higher current efficiency than the light-emitting elements 6 and 7. The maximum external quantum efficiency of the light-emitting element 5 is 34%, which is an extremely excellent value. The light-emitting element 5 was driven at a lower voltage than the light-emitting elements 6 and 7. Thus, the light-emitting element 5 shows excellent power efficiency.

Accordingly, when a light-emitting layer includes an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, such as 4,6mCzP2Pm or mCzP3Pm, the content of a compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, such as PCCH, is preferably low.

As described above, by employing the structure of one embodiment of the present invention, a light-emitting element having high emission efficiency can be fabricated. A light-emitting element with reduced power consumption can be fabricated. A light-emitting element which has high emission efficiency and reduced power consumption and emits blue light can be fabricated.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other examples and embodiments as appropriate.

Example 3

In this example, thin films that can be used for a light-emitting layer of a light-emitting element were fabricated and their optical characteristics were measured. Table 11 lists the details of the thin films. Note that Examples 1 and 2 and Embodiment 1 can be referred to for the structures of the compounds.

TABLE 11 Materials (weight ratio) Sample PCCP PCCH 35DCzPPy Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ Thin film 1 1 0 0 0.06 Thin film 2 0.99 0.01 0 0.06 Thin film 3 0.9 0.1 0 0.06 Thin film 4 0 1 0 0.06 Thin film 5 1 0 0.3 0.06 Thin film 6 0 1 0.3 0.06 Thin film 7 1 0 1 0 Thin film 8 0 1 1 0

<Fabrication of Thin Films 1 to 8>

As the thin film 1, PCCP and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.06 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 2, PCCP, PCCH, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:PCCH:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=0.99:0.01:0.06 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 3, PCCP, PCCH, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:PCCH:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=0.9:0.1:0.06 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 4, PCCH and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.06 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 5, PCCP, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:35DCzPPy: Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.3:0.06 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 6, PCCH, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃=1:0.3:0.06 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 7, PCCP and 35DCzPPy were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:35DCzPPy=1:1 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 8, PCCH and 35DCzPPy were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:35DCzPPy=1:1 to a thickness of 50 nm.

<Measurement Results of Emission Quantum Yield>

Emission quantum yields were measured at room temperature with the use of an absolute PL quantum yield measurement system (C11347-01 produced by Hamamatsu Photonics K. K.).

FIG. 61 shows emission spectra of the thin films 1 to 4 under irradiation with light with a wavelength of 350 nm; FIG. 62 shows emission spectra of the thin films 5 and 6 under irradiation with light with a wavelength of 350 nm; and FIG. 63 shows emission spectra of the thin films 7 and 8 under irradiation with light with a wavelength of 312 nm. From each of the thin films 1 to 6, an emission spectrum that has a peak wavelength of approximately 473 nm and is derived from Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ was obtained. From the thin film 7, an emission spectrum that has a peak wavelength of approximately 413 nm and is derived from PCCP was obtained. From the thin film 8, an emission spectrum that has a peak wavelength of approximately 413 nm and is derived from PCCH was obtained.

FIG. 64 to FIG. 66 show the measurement results of the emission quantum yields (PL quantum yields) of the thin films 1 to 8. FIG. 64 shows the measurement results for the thin films 1 to 4, FIG. 65 shows those for the thin films 5 and 6, and FIG. 66 shows those for the thin films 7 and 8. In each of FIG. 64 to FIG. 66, the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of the irradiated excitation light. Table 12 shows the measurement results of the emission quantum yields (PL quantum yields) of the thin films 1 to 8 when irradiated with light with a wavelength of 350 nm. Note that PCCP, PCCH, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ each have an absorption with respect to light with a wavelength of 350 nm.

TABLE 12 PL quantum yield Sample (%) Thin film 1 89 Thin film 2 90 Thin film 3 84 Thin film 4 83 Thin film 5 76 Thin film 6 21 Thin film 7 23 Thin film 8 0.8

As shown in Table 12, the results for the thin films 1 to 6 including the guest material Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ show that the emission quantum yields of the thin films 1 to 5 are as high as 76% to 90%. In contrast, the emission quantum yield of the thin film 6 is as low as 21%. The above results suggest that in a thin film in which PCCH and 35DCzPPy coexist as in the thin film 6, the emission quantum yield of the guest material Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ decreases.

The results for the thin films 7 and 8 not including a guest material show that the emission quantum yield of the thin film 8 is less than 1%, which is extremely low, while that of the thin film 7 is 23%. The above results suggest that in a thin film where PCCH and 35DCzPPy coexist, the emission quantum yield decreases also when the guest material Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ is not contained. It is thus conceivable that the reduction in emission quantum yield of the thin film 6 that includes the guest material results from the coexistence of PCCH and 35DCzPPy.

<Measurement 1 of Transient Fluorescent Characteristics>

Next, transient fluorescent characteristics of the thin films 1 to 6 were measured using time-resolved emission measurement.

A picosecond fluorescence lifetime measurement system (manufactured by Hamamatsu Photonics K.K.) was used for the measurement. In this measurement, the thin film was irradiated with pulsed laser, and emission of the thin film which was attenuated from the laser irradiation underwent time-resolved measurement using a streak camera. A nitrogen gas laser with a wavelength of 337 nm was used as the pulsed laser. The thin film was irradiated with pulsed laser with a pulse width of 500 ps at a repetition rate of 10 Hz. By integrating data obtained by the repeated measurement, data with a high S/N ratio was obtained. The measurement was performed at room temperature (in an atmosphere kept at 23° C.). Note that PCCP, PCCH, and Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃ each have an absorption at least at a wavelength of 337 nm.

The measured transient fluorescent characteristics of the thin films 1 to 6 are shown in FIG. 67.

As shown in FIG. 67, only the thin film 6 was found to have a short emission lifetime. It was thus suggested that in a thin film where PCCH and 35DCzPPy coexist, there is another deactivation process in addition to the emission process of Ir(mpptz-diPrp)₃.

<Fabrication of Thin Films 9 to 18>

Next, mixed films were fabricated using various organic compounds and their transient fluorescent characteristics were measured. Table 13 lists the details of the thin films. Note that Examples 1 and 2 and Embodiment 1 can be referred to for the structures of the compounds.

TABLE 13 Materials (weight ratio) Sample 0.5 0.5 0.125 Thin film 9 PCCP 35DCzPPy Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 10 PCCH 35DCzPPy Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 11 PCCH TmPyPB Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 12 PCCH 4,4′mCzP2BPy Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 13 PCCH 5,5′mCzP2BPy(3) Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 14 PCCH TCTA Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 15 PCCH mCP Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 16 PCCP 4,6mCzP2Pm Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 17 PCCH 4,6mCzP2Pm Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ Thin film 18 PCCH mCzP3Pm Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃

As the thin film 9, PCCP, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:35DCzPPy: Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 10, PCCH, 35DCzPPy, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:35DCzPPy:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 11, PCCH, TmPyPB, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:TmPyPB:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 12, PCCH, 4,4′mCzP2BPy, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:4,4′mCzP2BPy:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 13, PCCH, 5,5′mCzP2BPy(3), and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:5,5′mCzP2BPy(3):Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 14, PCCH, TCTA, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:TCTA:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 15, PCCH, mCP, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:mCP:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 16, PCCP, 4,6mCzP2Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCP:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 17, PCCH, 4,6mCzP2Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:4,6mCzP2Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

As the thin film 18, PCCH, mCzP3Pm, and Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ were deposited over a quartz substrate by co-evaporation in a weight ratio of PCCH:mCzP3Pm:Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃=0.5:0.5:0.125 to a thickness of 50 nm.

<Measurement 2 of Transient Fluorescent Characteristics>

From the thin films 9 to 18, blue light emission derived from the guest material Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ was observed. Transient fluorescent characteristics of the light emission from the thin films 9 to 18 were measured using time-resolved emission measurement. The measurement method is similar to that used for the thin films 1 to 6. Note that Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ has an absorption at least at a wavelength of 337 nm.

The measured transient fluorescent characteristics of the thin films 9 to 15 are shown in FIG. 68, and those of the thin films 16 to 18 are shown in FIG. 69.

As shown in FIG. 68, the emission lifetimes of the thin films 10 to 13 are shorter than those of the thin films 9, 14, and 15. The thin film 9 does not contain an organic compound with an NH group, and the thin films 14 and 15 do not contain an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. In contrast, the thin films 10 to 13 contain both the organic compound (PCCH) having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group and the organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. Thus, it was suggested that another deactivation process as well as the emission process of the guest material Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ occurs owing to the interaction between those two organic compounds.

As shown in FIG. 69, the emission lifetimes of the thin films 17 and 18 are shorter than the emission lifetime of the thin film 16. The thin film 16 does not contain an organic compound with an NH group. In contrast, the thin films 17 and 18 contain the organic compound (PCCH) having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group and the organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton. Thus, it was suggested that another deactivation process as well as the emission process of the guest material Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃ occurs owing to the interaction between those two organic compounds.

It was shown that when a thin film that can be used for a light-emitting layer includes an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group and an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, excitons are deactivated and the emission quantum yield decreases in the thin film that can be used for a light-emitting layer. In other words, when a light-emitting layer contains an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, the content of an organic compound having a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group is preferably low in one embodiment of the present invention.

The structure described in this embodiment can be used in combination with any of the structures described in the other examples and embodiments as appropriate.

Reference Example 1

In this reference example, a method for synthesizing tris{2-[4-(4-cyano-2,6-diisobutylphenyl)-5-(2-methylphenyl)-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl-N²]phenyl-κC}iridium(III) (abbreviation: Ir(mpptz-diBuCNp)₃), which is the organometallic complex used as the guest material in Example 2, is described.

Synthesis Example 1 Step 1: Synthesis of 4-amino-3,5-diisobutylbenzonitrile

Into a 1000-mL three-neck flask were put 9.4 g (50 mmol) of 4-amino-3,5-dichlorobenzonitrile, 26 g (253 mmol) of isobutylboronic acid, 54 g (253 mmol) of tripotassium phosphate, 2.0 g (4.8 mmol) of 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-dimethoxybiphenyl (S-phos), and 500 mL of toluene. The air in the flask was replaced with nitrogen, and this mixture was degassed while being stirred under reduced pressure. After the degassing, 0.88 g (0.96 mmol) of tris(dibenzylideneacetone)palladium(0) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 130° C. under a nitrogen stream for 8 hours. Toluene was added to the reacted solution, and the solution was filtered through a filter aid in which Celite, aluminum oxide, and Celite were stacked in this order. The obtained filtrate was concentrated to give an oily substance. The obtained oily substance was purified by silica gel column chromatography. Toluene was used as a developing solvent. The resulting fraction was concentrated to give 10 g of a yellow oily substance in a yield of 87%. The obtained yellow oily substance was identified as 4-amino-3,5-diisobutylbenzonitrile by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy. The synthesis scheme of Step 1 is shown in (a-1) below.

Step 2: Synthesis of Hmpptz-diBuCNp

Into a 300-mL three-neck flask were put 11 g (48 mmol) of 4-amino-3,5-diisobutylbenzonitrile synthesized in Step 1, 4.7 g (16 mmol) of N-(2-methylphenyl)chloromethylidene-N′-phenylchloromethylidenehydrazine, and 40 mL of N,N-dimethylaniline, and the mixture was stirred at 160° C. under a nitrogen stream for 7 hours to be reacted. After the reaction, the reacted solution was added to 300 mL of 1M hydrochloric acid and stirring was performed for 3 hours. Ethyl acetate was added to this mixture, an organic layer and an aqueous layer were separated and the aqueous layer was subjected to extraction with ethyl acetate. The organic layer and the solution of the extract were combined, and washed with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium hydrogen carbonate and then with saturated brine, and anhydrous magnesium sulfate was added to the organic layer for drying. The obtained mixture was subjected to gravity filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated to give an oily substance. The obtained oily substance was purified by silica gel column chromatography. As a developing solvent, a 5:1 hexane-ethyl acetate mixed solvent was used. The obtained fraction was concentrated to give a solid. Hexane was added to the obtained solid, and the mixture was irradiated with ultrasonic waves and then subjected to suction filtration to give 2.0 g of a white solid in a yield of 28%. The obtained white solid was identified as 4-(4-cyano-2,6-diisobutylphenyl)-3-(2-methylphenyl)-5-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: Hmpptz-diBuCNp) by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy. The synthesis scheme of Step 2 is shown in (b-1) below.

Step 3: Synthesis of Ir(Mpptz-diBuCNp)₃

Into a reaction container equipped with a three-way cock were put 2.0 g (4.5 mmol) of Hmpptz-diBuCNp synthesized in Step 2 and 0.44 g (0.89 mmol) of tris(acetylacetonato)iridium(III), and the mixture was stirred at 250° C. under an argon stream for 43 hours. The obtained reaction mixture was added to dichloromethane, and an insoluble matter was removed. The obtained filtrate was concentrated to give a solid. The obtained solid was purified by silica gel column chromatography. As a developing solvent, dichloromethane was used. The obtained fraction was concentrated to give a solid. The obtained solid was recrystallized from ethyl acetate/hexane, so that 0.32 g of a yellow solid was obtained in a yield of 23%. Then, 0.31 g of the obtained yellow solid was purified by a train sublimation method. The purification by sublimation was performed by heating at 310° C. under a pressure of 2.6 Pa with an argon flow rate of 5.0 mL/min for 19 hours. After the purification by sublimation, 0.26 g of a yellow solid was obtained at a collection rate of 84%. The synthesis scheme of Step 3 is shown in (c-1) below.

The protons (¹H) of the yellow solid that was obtained in Step 3 were measured by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy. The obtained values are shown below.

¹H-NMR δ (CDCl₃): 0.33 (d, 18H), 0.92 (d, 18H), 1.51-1.58 (m, 3H), 1.80-1.88 (m, 6H), 2.10-2.15 (m, 6H), 2.26-2.30 (m, 3H), 2.55 (s, 9H), 6.12 (d, 3H), 6.52 (t, 3H), 6.56 (d, 3H), 6.72 (t, 3H), 6.83 (t, 3H), 6.97 (d, 3H), 7.16 (t, 3H), 7.23 (d, 3H), 7.38 (s, 3H), 7.55 (s, 3H).

This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial no. 2015-257631 filed with Japan Patent Office on Dec. 29, 2015, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A light-emitting element comprising a light-emitting layer, wherein the light-emitting layer comprises a first organic compound and a guest material, wherein the first organic compound comprises a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, and wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound comprising a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03.
 2. A light-emitting element comprising a light-emitting layer, wherein the light-emitting layer comprises a first organic compound and a guest material, wherein the first organic compound comprises at least one of a pyridine skeleton, a diazine skeleton, and a triazine skeleton, and wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound comprising a pyrrole skeleton with an NH group, an imidazole skeleton with an NH group, a triazole skeleton with an NH group, a tetrazole skeleton with an NH group, or an aromatic amine skeleton with an NH group to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03.
 3. A light-emitting element comprising a light-emitting layer, wherein the light-emitting layer comprises a first organic compound, a second organic compound, and a guest material, wherein the first organic compound comprises a nitrogen-containing six-membered heteroaromatic skeleton, wherein the second organic compound comprises at least one of a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton and a tertiary amine skeleton, and wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound comprising a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton with an NH group, a secondary amine skeleton with an NH group, or a primary amine skeleton with an NH group to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.
 4. A light-emitting element comprising a light-emitting layer, wherein the light-emitting layer comprises a first organic compound, a second organic compound, and a guest material, wherein the first organic compound comprises at least one of a pyridine skeleton, a diazine skeleton, and a triazine skeleton, wherein the second organic compound comprises at least one of a pyrrole skeleton, an imidazole skeleton, a triazole skeleton, a tetrazole skeleton, and an aromatic amine skeleton, and wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound comprising a pyrrole skeleton with an NH group, an imidazole skeleton with an NH group, a triazole skeleton with an NH group, a tetrazole skeleton with an NH group, or an aromatic amine skeleton with an NH group to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.
 5. The light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein stabilization energy in cleavage in an NH bond in the NH group is less than 0 eV.
 6. The light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound comprising a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton in which a nitrogen atom comprises an unpaired electron or an organic compound comprising an aromatic amine skeleton in which a nitrogen atom comprises an unpaired electron to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03.
 7. The light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the first organic compound to the first organic compound is less than or equal to 0.03.
 8. The light-emitting element according to claim 3, wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound comprising a nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocyclic skeleton in which a nitrogen atom comprises an unpaired electron or an organic compound comprising an aromatic amine skeleton in which a nitrogen atom comprises an unpaired electron to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.
 9. The light-emitting element according to claim 3, wherein in the light-emitting layer, a weight ratio of an organic compound in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the first organic compound to the second organic compound is less than or equal to 0.01.
 10. The light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein the guest material is configured to convert triplet excitation energy into light emission.
 11. The light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein the guest material comprises iridium.
 12. A display device comprising the light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein the display device comprises at least one of a color filter and a transistor.
 13. An electronic device comprising the display device according to claim 12, wherein the electronic device comprises at least one of a housing and a touch sensor.
 14. A lighting device comprising the light-emitting element according to claim 1, wherein the lighting device comprises at least one of a housing and a touch sensor. 